Garmin Street Atlas USA 2015 Plus - Owner's Manual

Street Atlas USA User Guide

WARNING: Messaging, tracking and SOS functions require an active Iridium satellite subscription.
Always test your device before you go.
This manual is provided as a convenience.
GARMIN IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THIS MANUAL AND DISCLAIMS ANY
LIABILITY ARISING FROM THE RELIANCE THEREON.

Table of Contents
Getting Started .......................................................................................................... 1
Welcome to Street Atlas USA .................................................................................... 1
Frequently Asked Questions ...................................................................................... 1
Helpful Tips ............................................................................................................ 8
Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management ....................................................... 11
Basic Functions ..................................................................................................... 11
Zooming In and Out .............................................................................................. 11
Panning/Centering the Map ..................................................................................... 13
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard .......................................................................... 13
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image ................................................................. 14
Measuring Distance and Area .................................................................................. 15
Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats.................................................................... 16
Searching Tips ...................................................................................................... 17
About the Interface................................................................................................ 18
Tab Area .............................................................................................................. 18
Control Panel ........................................................................................................ 18
Overview Map ....................................................................................................... 19
Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 20
Tutorials ................................................................................................................. 21
Tutorial: Use the E-Z Nav Route Wizard ................................................................... 21
Tutorial: Find Points of Interest on a Route ............................................................... 24
Tutorial: Plan a Long Distance Trip .......................................................................... 26
Tutorial: Share Maps .............................................................................................. 29
Tutorial: Route with XData Points ............................................................................ 33
Map Legend ............................................................................................................. 35
Map Legend .......................................................................................................... 35
Using the Toolbar ..................................................................................................... 39
Showing/Hiding Toolbar Options .............................................................................. 39
Reordering the Toolbar Options ............................................................................... 39
To Create a New Map File ....................................................................................... 39
To Open a Map File ................................................................................................ 39
To Save a Map File ................................................................................................ 40
To Share Maps ...................................................................................................... 40
To Create a Route ................................................................................................. 40
To Start/Stop Your GPS Connection ......................................................................... 41
To Use GPS NavMode ............................................................................................. 41
To Open the Map Library ........................................................................................ 42
To View Imagery ................................................................................................... 42
To Get Information About a Location ........................................................................ 43
To Choose Options ................................................................................................. 44
iii

Street Atlas USA User Guide
To Add Images to a GPS Location ............................................................................ 44
To Grab and Pan the Map ....................................................................................... 44
To Measure Distance .............................................................................................. 45
To Print ................................................................................................................ 45
To Print the Map Screen ......................................................................................... 45
Customizing the Map and Tab Display ......................................................................... 47
Customizing the Interface ....................................................................................... 47
Displaying Basic Map Features ................................................................................ 47
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences ................................................................. 49
Changing the Map Colors ........................................................................................ 50
Changing the Map Magnification Level ...................................................................... 51
Changing How POIs Display on the Map ................................................................... 51
Setting Units of Measure Preferences ....................................................................... 52
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas .............................................................................. 54
Showing or Hiding Tabs .......................................................................................... 55
Importing/Exporting Tab Manager Preferences .......................................................... 56
Reordering the Tabs .............................................................................................. 57
Using Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................... 59
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme .................................................................... 59
Creating a New Custom Scheme .............................................................................. 59
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme ................................................... 59
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme ............................................................................. 61
Renaming a Custom Scheme .................................................................................. 61
Deleting a Custom Scheme ..................................................................................... 62
Importing a Custom Scheme ................................................................................... 62
Exporting a Custom Scheme ................................................................................... 62
Searching For Commands ....................................................................................... 63
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme .......................................................... 63
Viewing Map Data .................................................................................................... 65
Saving Data to Your Hard Drive ............................................................................... 65
Connecting Data .................................................................................................... 65
Viewing Imagery ................................................................................................... 66
Showing Roads in Raster Data ................................................................................ 66
Using Map Files ........................................................................................................ 67
Map Files Overview ................................................................................................ 67
Creating and Deleting Map Files .............................................................................. 67
Opening an Existing Map File .................................................................................. 68
Setting which Map File Opens with Street Atlas USA .................................................. 69
Saving a Map File .................................................................................................. 70
Editing a Map File .................................................................................................. 70
Creating Transfer Files ........................................................................................... 71
Creating Transfer Files with Hyperlinked Files ............................................................ 72
iv

Table of Contents
Importing Transfer Files ......................................................................................... 73
E-mailing a Transfer File ......................................................................................... 75
Printing ................................................................................................................... 77
Printing a Map ....................................................................................................... 77
Printing a Route and Directions ............................................................................... 78
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map ....................................................................... 79
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map ........................................................... 81
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map ......................................................... 82
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map ........................................ 83
Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map ....................................................... 83
Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map .................................................................... 84
Finding a Location on the Map.................................................................................... 89
Find Overview ....................................................................................................... 89
Find Options ......................................................................................................... 89
Performing a Basic Search ...................................................................................... 90
Performing an Advanced Search .............................................................................. 91
Performing a POI Search ........................................................................................ 94
Finding Points Near Your Current Location ................................................................ 95
Finding a Symbol by its Name ................................................................................. 96
Tips on Viewing Search Results ............................................................................... 97
Keywords for Category Searches ............................................................................. 98
MapTags: Converting, Moving, Hiding, and Deleting ................................................. 100
Using Address Book Contacts ................................................................................... 103
Searching for Address Book Contacts ..................................................................... 103
Importing Existing Address Book Information .......................................................... 103
Manually Entering Address Book Information .......................................................... 104
Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact ....................................................... 104
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book .................................................................. 105
Manually Moving a Contact on the Map ................................................................... 105
Relocating Address Book Contacts ......................................................................... 106
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book ................................................................ 106
Showing/Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map ................................................. 107
Deleting Your Entire Address Book ......................................................................... 107
Exporting Your Address Book ................................................................................ 108
Searching for Phone Book Listings ............................................................................ 109
Using Phone Data ................................................................................................ 109
Searching for a Phone Book Listing ........................................................................ 109
Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road ....................................................... 112
Using XData .......................................................................................................... 115
XData Overview .................................................................................................. 115
Importing Data ................................................................................................... 115
Managing Datasets .............................................................................................. 117
v

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Viewing Dataset Records ...................................................................................... 118
Creating a Route with XData Records ..................................................................... 119
Geocoding or Moving a Record's Location ............................................................... 119
Exporting Data .................................................................................................... 120
Printing XData Dataset Records ............................................................................. 121
Using the Draw Tools .............................................................................................. 123
Draw Overview ................................................................................................... 123
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools ................................................................................... 126
Draw File Management ......................................................................................... 126
Creating a New Draw File ..................................................................................... 126
Saving a Draw File ............................................................................................... 127
Deleting a Draw File ............................................................................................. 128
Hiding Draw Files ................................................................................................ 128
Editing/Locking Draw Files .................................................................................... 129
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files .......................................................................... 130
Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files ........................................................ 131
Importing Files to Draw Files................................................................................. 131
Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File ....................................................... 133
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File ......................................................................... 135
Saving a Track as a GPS Log ................................................................................. 135
Viewing the Contents of a Draw File ....................................................................... 136
Copying a Draw File ............................................................................................. 138
Changing Draw Object Types ................................................................................ 138
Renaming a Draw File .......................................................................................... 139
Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another ............................................ 140
Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File ........................................................ 141
Using Draw Objects ............................................................................................. 141
Copying and Placing Draw Objects ......................................................................... 141
Moving Draw Objects ........................................................................................... 142
Renaming a Draw Object ...................................................................................... 143
Deleting Draw Objects ......................................................................................... 144
Snapping Draw Objects ........................................................................................ 145
Adding Points to Draw Objects .............................................................................. 146
Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects ............................................. 146
Labeling a Draw Object ........................................................................................ 147
Routable Roads, Tracks, Lines, Arcs, and Splines ..................................................... 148
Drawing Routable Roads on the Map ...................................................................... 148
Drawing a Line, Arc, or Spline on the Map .............................................................. 148
Drawing a Track on the Map ................................................................................. 149
Editing a Routable Road, Line, Arc, or Spline ........................................................... 150
Editing a Track .................................................................................................... 151
Placing a Routable Road, Line, Arc, or Spline at a Specific Location ............................ 152
vi

Table of Contents
Joining and Breaking Linear Objects ....................................................................... 152
Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons .......................................................................... 153
Drawing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map ................................................. 153
Editing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon ................................................................... 154
Placing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map .................................................. 155
Waypoints, Symbols, MapNotes, Text Labels, and Images ........................................ 156
Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or Image to the Map ..................... 156
Editing a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or Image ..................................... 158
Placing a Waypoint, Symbol, Text Label, or Image at a Specific Location .................... 159
Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes ..................................................................... 159
Custom Symbols ................................................................................................. 160
Custom Symbols Overview ................................................................................... 160
Creating a New Symbol ........................................................................................ 161
GPS Device Custom Symbols ................................................................................ 162
Editing a Symbol ................................................................................................. 163
Finding a Custom Symbol ..................................................................................... 164
Importing a Bitmap ............................................................................................. 164
Copying and Pasting ............................................................................................ 165
Pasting a Bitmap into XSym .................................................................................. 166
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym ............................................................................... 167
Removing a Symbol ............................................................................................. 167
Draw Tool Box .................................................................................................... 168
Using the Transparency Option ............................................................................. 168
Anchor Position ................................................................................................... 169
Cursor Position .................................................................................................... 170
Creating a New Symbol Set .................................................................................. 170
Opening a Symbol Set ......................................................................................... 171
Routing ................................................................................................................. 173
Creating a Route ................................................................................................. 173
Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias ...................................................................... 174
Changing the Routing Method ............................................................................... 177
Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route ................................................ 177
Viewing Route Directions ...................................................................................... 177
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing ................................................................. 178
Saving Route Directions as Text ............................................................................ 179
Setting Your Routing Preferences .......................................................................... 179
Editing a Route ................................................................................................... 180
Editing Roads ...................................................................................................... 181
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote ................................................................... 182
Moving Route MapNotes ....................................................................................... 182
Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map........................................................... 183
Saving a Route .................................................................................................... 183
vii

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Deleting a Route ................................................................................................. 184
Importing Routes ................................................................................................ 185
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences ................................................ 185
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route................................................................... 186
Converting a Route to a GPS Log ........................................................................... 186
Using GPS ............................................................................................................. 189
GPS Overview ..................................................................................................... 189
GPS Options/Initializing GPS ................................................................................. 189
Using NavMode or GPS Tab View ........................................................................... 192
Tracking a Route with GPS.................................................................................... 193
Getting Back on Track When Off Course ................................................................. 195
Using the E-Z Nav Route Wizard ............................................................................ 195
Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking ................................................. 196
Playing Back a Log File ......................................................................................... 197
Previewing a GPS Log File ..................................................................................... 198
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log .......................................................................... 199
Monitoring Your GPS Status .................................................................................. 199
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information...................................................................... 200
Viewing Sun and Moon Information........................................................................ 201
GPS Devices ....................................................................................................... 202
About GPS .......................................................................................................... 202
Using Small-screen Devices ..................................................................................... 205
Using Small-screen Devices .................................................................................. 205
Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition ......................................................... 207
Voice Overview ................................................................................................... 207
Voice Options ...................................................................................................... 207
Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition ......................................................... 208
Training the Speech Recognition Engine ................................................................. 208
Voice Commands ................................................................................................. 210
Speech Recognition Tips ....................................................................................... 212
Changing Voice Output ......................................................................................... 214
Voice Preferences ................................................................................................ 214
Voice Prompts ..................................................................................................... 215
Exchanging Information with A Third-party GPS Device ............................................... 217
Sending Route Information ................................................................................... 217
Sending Tracks ................................................................................................... 218
Sending Waypoints .............................................................................................. 218
Receiving a Route ................................................................................................ 219
Receiving a Track ................................................................................................ 220
Receiving Waypoints ............................................................................................ 220
Using NetLink ........................................................................................................ 223
NetLink .............................................................................................................. 223
viii

Table of Contents
Using GeoTagger .................................................................................................... 225
Getting Started with GeoTagger ............................................................................ 225
Tagging an Image ............................................................................................... 225
Calculate the Timestamp Offset ............................................................................. 226
Legal Information ................................................................................................... 227
Street Atlas USA® 2015 Plus Single-User License Agreement ................................... 227
Important Notices................................................................................................ 231
Index .................................................................................................................... 237
ix

Welcome to Street Atlas USA
Getting Started
Tips
• Double-click a book in the Table of Contents to view all of its associated topics.
Click a topic to read its contents.
• Additional information is available online:
o
o
support.delorme.com
forum.delorme.com
Street Atlas USA Features
• GPS NavMode—a hands free full-screen view that you can view in 2-D or 3-D. GPS
Radar results display on the screen. Optimized for use on netbooks.
• Find a street address, city/town, ZIP/Postal Code, coordinate, point of interest, and
more. Use the advanced search function to locate the intersection of two streets, a
specific category of map items, such as landmarks along the current route, or an
area code and exchange.
• Connect your GPS device to the program and track your progress on a portable
computer as you travel. View your next turn as well as the turn after that—very
helpful when you need to make a turn directly after another turn. You can even use
the automatic back-on-track feature to recalculate your route when detours v9er you
off course.
• Use MapShare to share your current map view and even route directions with
anyone.
• Use the NetLink tab to get free downloads of data and imagery from the Map Library
for your area of interest.
• Use Canadian data to create door-to-door routes in Canada.
• Import your personal address book information and visualize your contacts on the
map. You can even use them as a start, stop, or finish route point or search for them
using the Find tab.
• Create custom keyboard shortcuts to navigate the program more easily than ever.
• Combine digital photos with GPS locations using GeoTagger.
• Use the toolbar to create routes, share maps, open/create/save map files, and edit
your preferences.
• Print high quality, detailed, single-page maps or mural maps as large as 3 x 3 pages.
• Print your route and/or route directions.
• Customize your map with routable roads, text, MapNotes, and more!
With the Phone tab in Street Atlas USA Plus, you can also:
• Search over 121 million residential and business phone listings, including Canada.
• Find phone numbers for a specific road.
Frequently Asked Questions
1

Street Atlas USA User Guide
These questions are asked most frequently by our customers.
• Where do I find the map and other options settings?
All options are located in the Options dialog box. To open it, click the Options button
on the toolbar. You can use it to modify GPS, voice, map feature, display,
and keyboard shortcut preferences. For more information, see the Toolbar topic.
Notes
• Some tabs also have an Options button , which opens the same dialog
box.
• You can also click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the
Options menu. Then, click Options to open the dialog box.
• How can I make the program open with my most recent map file instead of in Salt
Lake City?
Use the Welcome Screen to determine if you want to create a new map file project
each time you open Street Atlas USA or if you want to open a recent map file. When
you use the new map file option, the default location is Salt Lake City.
• Upgraders only: What happens to my map files when I upgrade?
Your map files, draw files, route files, and log files are stored in the DeLorme Docs
folder, usually found on the root of your computer's C: drive. They are not affected
by an install or removal of DeLorme software.
• Upgraders only: Why doesn't this version of Street Atlas USA overwrite the older
version?
This allows you to view both versions on the same computer.
• Upgraders only: Should I uninstall my previous version before installing this
version of Street Atlas USA?
Uninstalling is not necessary; however, you can uninstall the previous edition of the
software either before or after installing this version of Street Atlas USA.
• Can I see my imagery and data from Topo USA, Topo North America, and XMap on
the map?
Yes, as long as the DeLorme Docs\Downloads is located in the same location for
Street Atlas USA as it was in Topo USA, Topo North America, or XMap.
Note You cannot view 7.5-minute USGS Quad maps, NOAA charts, or DigitalGlobe®
maps in Street Atlas USA.
• How do I create a route?
You can create a route using the Route tab, right-click menu options, or the toolbar.
If you are using a GPS, you can use E-Z Nav to quickly create a route to a location.
See the following topics for more information about creating routes.
Creating a Route
Tutorial: Plan a Long Distance Trip
Tutorial: Use the E-Z Nav Route Wizard
2

Getting Started
• How do I import files from an earlier version of Street Atlas USA into this version?
You can import map files, routes, and draw files from many other DeLorme mapping
programs by using a drag-and-drop operation or by using the import function in
Street Atlas USA.
Note Information for Street Atlas USA 9.0 and earlier users.
The structure of map files has changed throughout the life of Street Atlas USA. Map
files in older products, such as Street Atlas USA 9.0 and earlier, are a single file that
contain route information, draw objects, and the current display settings. These map
files cannot be opened in this version of Street Atlas USA; however, you can view the
route and/or draw information that the map file contains using the import and dragand-drop
functions within Street Atlas USA.
•
Map files do not contain the draw and route information but connect to separate
route and draw files. You can open these map files in Street Atlas USA to view their
contents. Or, you can import/drag-and-drop the draw/route information individually.
To Open A Map File
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File and then click Open.
3. Select the map file you want to view and then click Open.
Notes
Street Atlas USA can open only map files with an .saf extension.
Regular Street Atlas USA only: If you have simplified file management
activated and the map file you are opening contains more then one draw file
or route file, you will be prompted to select the file you want to open.
4. Click OK. The files are imported into one .saf file.
Note Once you save the map file in Street Atlas USA, you can no longer
open it in previous versions of Street Atlas USA. If you want to continue to
use the map file in a previous version, select Save As and rename the file.
To Import a Route
5. Using Windows® Explorer®, browse to the source folder of the route file. The
default directory is C:\DeLorme Docs\Navigation or C:\Program Files\Street
Atlas USA.
6. Locate the file you want to import.
7. While holding the left mouse button, drag the file to the Windows task bar
button for Street Atlas USA (Street Atlas USA opens) and then drag the file to
the map. Release the mouse button when finished.
8. Drag the file on top of the map and release the left mouse button. The file
imports and displays the route.
To Import a Draw File
9. Click the Draw tab, click File, and then click Import.
10. Browse to the path where your draw files are stored. The default directory is
C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw.
11. Under Files of Type, select the file type from the list. If the type is not listed,
select All Files; for example, All Files (*.*).
3

Street Atlas USA User Guide
12. Click the file to select it and then click Open. The imported draw layer
displays in Street Atlas USA. A copy of the draw layer is imported into the
current map file and the original file is not modified.
• What is the difference between NavMode and the GPS tab view when using GPS?
The default GPS view is NavMode—a hands free full-screen view that you can display
in 2-D or 3-D. By default, the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are minimized;
however, you can customize your interface. By default, NavMode uses the E-Z Nav
route wizard so you can quickly plan a trip.
The GPS tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and
tracking. By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible, but you can opt to hide
them. It is available only in 2-D mode. For more information, see Using NavMode or
GPS Tab View.
To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode button
on the toolbar. When the
button appears indented, NavMode is on.
Note The button is grayed out unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are
playing back a GPS log file
You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and click the GPS tab. You
can also click the Options button on the GPS tab.
2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off, or select the check box to
turn it on.
3. Click OK.
• How do I find a specific location?
Street Atlas USA offers powerful search tools that enable you to locate any place in
the United States or Canada.
In addition, you can search for places along your route, within a certain radius of the
current map center, or within a particular region.
To access the search features in Street Atlas USA, click the Find tab. For more
information on searching for specific locations, see Performing a Basic Search,
Performing a POI Search, Performing an Advanced Search, and Finding POIs Near
Your Current Location.
• How can I find all of the nearby points of interest?
Right-click your location on the map, click Find Travel POIs, and then click the
distance you want to search within (1 mile, 5 miles, or 10 miles). The points of
interest display in Find tab results area.
OR
If you are tracking with a GPS device, do a radar search to locate points of interest
within a designated distance of your current GPS position.
• How do I perform an Along the Way search in the Find tab and print my results?
You can search for names or categories along your current route by doing an
advanced search in the Find tab. You can then print your search results using the
4

Getting Started
Along the Way print option. Use the following steps to search for a name/category
along your current route and print the results:
1. Click the Find tab and then click Advanced. The Advanced dialog area
displays.
2. Select Category from the From drop-down list.
3. Select Current Route from the Within drop-down list.
4. Type the appropriate keyword in the Keywords text box.
5. Type the distance within which you want to search in the Distance text box.
6. Click Search. The search results display in the dialog area.
7. Click the Print tab and then click Route. The Route dialog area displays.
8. Select the Along the Way check box.
9. Click Print. The search results print.
• How do I turn on voice navigation?
Voice is used in the following ways:
•
• Listen to your route directions while tracking along a route using GPS.
• Use the speech recognition feature to issue commands or ask questions about
map panning and zooming, navigation, or GPS functions.
• Why can't I hear the voice during voice navigation?
The voice navigation system depends on your computer's sound system for volume
levels.
To Set the Volume Level
If your system is not playing the sound loud enough, use the following steps to verify
the Wave volume control is set to its highest levels.
•
1. From the Start menu, point to Programs, point to Accessories, point to
Multimedia (or Entertainment depending on your operating system) and
then click Volume Control.
OR
If available, click the audio control shortcut on your taskbar.
2. In the Wave column, move the Volume slider to the top.
3. Close the Volume Control dialog box.
If the voice commands are still not loud enough to hear, contact your sound card
manufacturer to download and install the latest driver for your specific model sound
card. The new driver may be able to provide louder output.
There are a variety of external speaker output options for your laptop. Some of them
are simply larger external speakers; others allow you to send the voice to your car
stereo speakers.
• Why doesn't Street Atlas USA recognize my voice?
To troubleshoot why Street Atlas USA may not recognize your voice, verify the
following:
•
5

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Ensure Street Atlas USA is the active application.
• Ensure you are wearing your microphone correctly. See your microphone's
user guide for more information.
• Train your speech engine in the environment in which you are using the Voice
tab of Street Atlas USA. It is important to speak as naturally as you did during
the training.
Note You can also designate a phrase with which to prefix all of your commands
(similar to Simon Says) within the program or the Speech settings in your Windows
Control Panel to change your voice settings.
• How do I get data updates or fix the roads on my map?
The data in Street Atlas USA can be updated only by buying a more recent version of
the product when it is available.
However, if you find there is a local road that is missing, you can add it to the
current draw layer using the Routable Roads Draw tool. For more information, see
the topic Drawing Routable Roads on the Map.
Note You can also report data corrections to DeLorme using the NetLink tab.
• What is a map file?
Street Atlas USA lets you save all of the work you have done in the mapping
application as a single workspace so you can open it later. These saved workspaces
are called map files.
A map file consists of the following items: coordinates of the map center, current
zoom level, current magnification, map display preferences, any added items: such
as draw layers, routes, and so forth. As you create new routes or draw layers,
change preferences or the map center, and so forth, they are added to the current
map file. Changes can be saved or discarded.
To learn how to create a map file in Street Atlas USA, see Creating and Deleting Map
Files.
• What do the different colors and symbols on the map mean?
The different colors on the map represent different areas of land use and land cover
(parks, population centers, water, forests, and so on). The Map Legend provides
examples and descriptions of the map features.
Click the Help button on the Street Atlas USA toolbar and click Map Legend to
display the Map Legend Help topic.
• What's the difference between a stop and a via?
When routing in Street Atlas USA, you have the option of adding/inserting stops or
vias in the route. A stop is a location in the middle of a route where you want to stop
and then proceed from. A via is a road on the map that you want to specifically use
when routing.
• What's the difference between adding and inserting a stop or via?
The Insert Stop/Via function arranges stops/vias geographically in the route. The Add
Stop/Via function adds stops/vias in the order you add them to the route.
• Why does my route fail to calculate?
6

Getting Started
Your route will fail to calculate if you create a route:
• With a route start, stop, via, or finish point in an area that you have
designated as a Route Avoid.
• That includes route points outside the United States, Mexico, or Canada.
• On an island without roads. In this case, Street Atlas USA will look for the
nearest road to that island to place the route point. If the nearest road is not
routable (for example, it is the only road on the island and/or the island does
not have ferry access), you will get an error message saying "Route failed to
calculate."
• Why do X marks display on the map when I calculate a route?
• When you place a route point in a location that isn't on a street, Street Atlas
USA finds the closest street to that location, marks the space between the
point you clicked and the street with X marks, and starts the route at the
street.
• If you search for an address that is on a walkway and place a route point on
it, Street Atlas USA finds the closest street to that location, marks the space
between the point you clicked and the street with X marks, and starts the
route at the street.
• Why are the tab area and control panel so narrow?
Street Atlas USA was designed to accommodate resolutions of 800 x 600 or higher.
If you are using a very high resolution (such as 1920 x 1200), the tab area and
control panel in Street Atlas USA may appear to be very narrow.
Note Use the Windows Control Panel to adjust your display settings.
• Can I send maps to my GPS device?
You cannot export maps to a GPS device with Street Atlas USA. You can send routes,
draw files, waypoints, and tracks.
• Why can’t I see all the information about my route on the Route tab?
If your have your screen resolution set to 800 x 600, some information, such as the
route summary, may not display for a longer route. Increase your screen resolution
to view all details.
• Regular Street Atlas USA only: What's the difference between advanced and
simplified file management?
Simplified file management allows you to save one route or draw layer in a single
map file.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in
a single map file.
During the product installation, you chose to use simplified or advanced file
management. Once the program is installed, you can verify the type of file
management you are using and change it. Click the arrow next to the Options
button
on the toolbar to open the menu, and then click Change File
Management. Your current option displays in the dialog box. To change the option,
click the button for the file management option you want to use. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
7

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Helpful Tips
These tips may help you use the features in your DeLorme mapping program. The Did You
Know? pop-up tutorials provide hints while you are working in the application.
Tips
• To disable a specific pop-up tutorial, select the Don't Show Again check box before
you close it.
• To disable all pop-up tutorials, click the Help button on the toolbar and click
Shut Off All Pop-up Tutorials.
• To enable all pop-tutorials after you have shut off one or more, click the Help button
on the toolbar and click Reset All Pop-up Tutorials.
Control Panel
If you want to...
Zoom the map out/in
quickly
Pan the map quickly
Update the coordinate
format that displays in the
Control Panel
View the last map center
Use this tip...
Drag the map cursor in an up-left direction to zoom the
map out or drag it in a down-right direction to zoom the
map in.
Position your cursor on the edge of the map; it becomes a
white hand that you can use to drag the map to the new
location.
Update your measurement preferences at any time using
the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Press the middle button in the Compass Rose in the
Control Panel to center the map on the previous map view.
This button performs an undo function for the last pan or
zoom (up to 256 times).
Draw
If you want to...
Create a route using a
road you have added to
the map with the Draw tab
Use this tip...
When drawing a routable road, click each existing road it
crosses to ensure that you can route on the new road.
When you open a track you've imported from your GPS
device, join the imported line with existing lines by rightclicking
each intersection and selecting Manage
Draw/Join.
Find
If you want to...
Modify a Find search result
Find a custom point of
interest (such as a Chinese
Use this tip...
Right-click a result item in the Find tab to add it as a
MapNote, insert it as a stop in your route, copy the
information to your clipboard, and so on.
You can use the Custom option to find other categories
8

Getting Started
restaurant) when
performing a GPS radar
search in Find
besides those listed, or to find multiple categories at once.
GPS
If you want to...
View a GPS log on the map
Use this tip...
Use the Draw tab to import a GPS log file and view it as a
line object on the map.
Info
If you want to...
Quickly view information
for a location on the map.
Use this tip...
Hover your cursor over objects on the map to see
information (such as road names, city/town, details about
draw objects, etc.) in the status line that appears at the
bottom of the map, just above the tab area.
Map Files
If you want to...
Determine which map file
opens when you open
Street Atlas USA.
Learn how to add route
and/or draw layers to your
map file
Use this tip...
Use the Welcome Screen to set which map file opens with
Street Atlas USA.
Add existing route and/or draw files to your map file by
clicking the Add button and selecting the Draw File or
Route File option.
Note In Street Atlas USA, you must use Advanced File
Management to use this option. This does not apply to
Street Atlas USA Plus.
Measurement Tool
If you want to...
Measure the
area/perimeter of a
location on the map
Use this tip...
Use the measure tool to draw a polygon on the map and
determine its area and perimeter. Just click point-by-point
to draw the polygon on the map and then double-click to
close the polygon. The area and perimeter display in the
center of the polygon.
Phone
If you want to...
Get all of the phone
listings for a particular
road.
Use this tip...
You can right-click the map on a road to view phone
listings for that road.
Note The Phone tab is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
9

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Print
If you want to...
Stop a page in a multipage
map from printing
Use this tip...
If you do not want to print all the pages in a multi-page
map, on the Layout graphic, click each page you do not
want to print.
Route
If you want to...
Reorder inserted stops
Create a route quickly
Reorder the columns in the
Route Directions list
Determine the difference
between adding and
inserting stops and vias
View information about
your second turn
Use this tip...
Reorder your inserted route stops using the Advanced
features in the Route tab.
For quick route creation, right-click the map and select one
of the Create Route options or use the Route buttons on
the toolbar.
Click the Directions list column headers to change the
column order.
Added stops/vias are placed in the order you add them to
the route. Inserted stops/vias are placed in the order you
would approach them between the Start and Finish points
of the route.
Click the Show Turns button when GPS tracking to view
information about the following turn.
Tab Area
If you want to...
Adjust the size of the tab
area
Show, hide, or reorder
tabs
Import or export a tab
configuration file
Use this tip...
Adjust the size of the tab area by dragging the top or right
side of the tab area.
Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to show,
hide, or reorder tabs.
Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to import or
export a tab configuration file
Voice
If you want to...
Create new speech
recognition profiles
Learn how to make the
microphone more sensitive
to your commands in noisy
environments
Use this tip...
You can create a new speech recognition profile for each of
your working environments (noisy, quiet) and users (your
spouse or child) by clicking the Speech settings in the
Windows Control Panel.
If there is background noise while you are speaking, it may
be helpful to precede all of your voice commands with a
special phrase (like Simon Says). See the Voice Settings
tab of the Options dialog box.
10

Getting Started
XData
If you want to...
Geoplace XData records
that do not have complete
address information or
were not correctly located
during the import process
Add a blank record to your
XData database
Use this tip...
You can drag a record from the Query list and place it at
the correct geo-location on the map.
To add a blank record to an XData database, you must
select All Records as the Table Display type.
Note The XData tab is available only in Street Atlas Plus.
Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management
Note for regular Street Atlas USA only
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
When you installed Street Atlas USA, you were given the option to use simplified or
advanced file management. Simplified file management allows you to have one route or
draw layer saved in a map file. If you want to save multiple route and/or draw layers in a
map file, you must activate advanced file management.
To Activate Advanced/Simplified File Management
Use the following steps to change your file management preferences.
1. Click the arrow next to the Options button on the toolbar.
2. Click Change File Management.
The Change File Management dialog box opens, indicating if the program is set to
use advanced or simplified file management.
3. To use advanced file management, click Advanced.
OR
To use simplified file management, click Simplified.
4. At the confirmation message, click OK.
5. You must restart Street Atlas USA to view the change in file management.
Note Some of the Help topics related to the Map Files tab, Route tab, and Draw tab include
instructions for both simplified and advanced file management. Be sure to follow the
instructions for the file management system you have selected. A note appears at the end
of each related Help topic.
Basic Functions
Zooming In and Out
11

Street Atlas USA User Guide
You can use the drag and zoom feature, zoom tools, or the data zoom level(Data zoom level
is the relationship between what you see in a map view and how it exists in reality. It is the
amount of geographic data displayed on a computer monitor. The data zoom level is similar
to the traditional fractional relationship expressed on paper maps. For example, 1:24,000,
1:100,000, 1:500,000, and so on.) to quickly change the zoom level of the map view.
Notes
• Increase the data zoom level number to show a smaller geographic area at greater
detail.
• Decrease the data zoom level number to show a larger geographic area at lesser
detail.
• If you view both the right (primary) and left (secondary) maps at different data
zoom levels, a box (or lines, depending on the current data zoom level) displays on
the map that is zoomed out the furthest. The box/lines indicate the area that is in
view on the other map.
• If you view the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not
equally represented on the screen (50/50), a box (or lines) displays on the map that
is covering the most screen area. The box/lines indicate the area that is in view on
the other map.
To Drag and Zoom In
Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map.
1. Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in a down-right
direction on the map to encompass the area you want to display. A view box displays
on the screen and changes dimension as you move the mouse. A label displays the
data zoom level at the current map center.
2. Once you reach the map area or data zoom level you want to display, release the
mouse button. The area you selected fills the map window, the map re-centers, and
the map view adjusts to show the appropriate level of detail.
Tip To move the view box to another location, press the SHIFT key at any time.
To Drag and Zoom Out
Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map.
1. Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in an up-left
direction on the map. A staircase with a small circle displays on the screen.
2. Continue dragging the mouse in an up-left direction. The small circle moves up the
steps, one step per data zoom level. A label displays the data zoom level to the
bottom-right of the staircase.
3. Once you reach the data zoom level you want to display, release the mouse button.
The map view adjusts to display the appropriate level of detail. The map center is
retained on your screen.
To Zoom In/Out Using the Zoom Tools
There are two sets of zoom tools. The zoom tools for the right map are located in the
Control Panel. The zoom tools for the left map are located at the top of the left map view.
Right
Map
Controls
Click the up arrow to zoom out one minor data zoom level at a
time. Click the down arrow to zoom in one minor data zoom
level at a time.
12

Getting Started
Click the Zoom In 1 tool to increase the detail number to the
next full level.
Click the Zoom Out 1 tool to decrease the detail number to the
next full level.
Click the Zoom Out 3 tool to decrease the detail number by
three full levels.
Left
Map
Controls
Click the plus button to increase the detail number to the next
full level.
Click the minus button to decrease the detail number to the next
full level.
The data zoom level of the left map displays in the text area to
the left of the buttons.
Tips
• Press ALT+PAGE UP on your keyboard to zoom out to the next full data zoom level.
Press ALT+PAGE DOWN on your keyboard to zoom in to the next full data zoom
level.
• Use the mouse wheel to zoom the map in and out. Rotate the mouse wheel to zoom
in by individual data zoom level steps or hold the SHIFT key while rotating the
mouse wheel to zoom to the next full data zoom level.
Panning/Centering the Map
Use any of the following methods to pan (move) or center the map.
• Click anywhere on the map. The point you click becomes the new map center.
• When you point near the map edge, a white hand displays. Drag the hand to move
the map in that direction.
• Click the Map Panning button on the toolbar to drag/pan the map in any
direction.
• Click anywhere on the overview map. The point you click becomes the new map
center. This allows you to traverse greater distances with each mouse click than you
can within the main map.
• Point anywhere on the black view box in the overview map window. When the
pointer becomes a , drag the view box to the new location.
• Use the search features on the Find tab to center the map on a particular location.
• Assign shortcut keys to pan the map up, down, left, or right in small increments.
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard
13

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Click the Copy to Clipboard button on the Print tab to copy your map to the clipboard.
You can then paste it into another program.
You can also right-click anywhere on the map and click Copy Map to Clipboard.
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image
You can save the current map view as a bitmap (.bmp) or JPEG (.jpg) image in all page
layout formats: Single, 2 x 2, and 3 x 3. If you select a multi-page format, all the active
pages are saved as individual bitmaps or JPEGs. The file name is the specified file name
with an incremental page number at the end.
See Printing a Map for information about printing a map without saving it as a file.
To Save a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG
Use the following steps to save a map as an image.
1. Locate the area on the map that you want to save as an image.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab (if it is not already selected).
3. Under Print Layout, select Page(the map print area is based on the paper size
specified in the Setup options) or Screen(the map print area is based on the screen
size).
The print area for a Page map displays as a red box and the print area for a Screen
map displays as a blue box on the overview map.
4. If you selected Page in step 3, the following options are available.
• Under Print Layout, select a layout option (Single, 2 x 2, or 3 x 3). The
print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map. In the example
below, 2 x 2 is selected. This means the print area encompasses four
standard pages at whatever paper size you specified in the Setup options. You
can assemble a multipage map into a large map.
• If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 and do not want to save all the pages in the
multipage map on the map layout graphic, click each page you do not want to
save. The page appears dimmed or gray. In the example below, page 4 will
not print.
• Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to save. If not, pan the
map to the location and zoom to the level you want.
Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges/reduces the map features and
changes the map area that you save as an image. If you increase the photo
zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc. are larger and your map area is
reduced. If you decrease the photo zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc.
are smaller and your map area is enlarged. The reduction/enlargement
percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom dropdown
list.
14

Getting Started
• If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print
area, print photo zoom, or other settings, select the Lock Print Center check
box. This locks the print area and changes the tab label to red.
• Add text or graphics to your map.
• Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire
area that will be saved as a bitmap image. Clear the check box to return to
your previous data zoom level.
6. Click the Save button .
The Save 2D Map Image dialog box opens.
7. Type the file name in the File Name text box, select to save the file as a .bmp or
.jpg from the Save as Type drop-down list, select the DPI (dots per inch) value
(optional), and click Save.
Measuring Distance and Area
Use the Measure tool on the toolbar to measure linear distance and area on the map
based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
The snap function snaps (attaches) the point of a measurement line to a point on a road or
another measurement object. This ensures a more accurate measurement of distance or
area. To measure area, you must completely enclose the area by snapping your finish point
to your starting point.
Notes
• The Measure tool is hidden by default. To show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Measure Distance.
• The Measure tool is the best way to measure short distances on the map. If you want to
measure the distance of a road, try creating a route. If you want to measure a large
area on the map, use the area object tools in the Draw tab.
• To disable the auto-snap function, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while using
the Measure tool.
• Measure objects (lines and areas) are saved with the current map file. When you create
a new map file, the measure objects do not display. If you want the same measure
objects on your new map file, you must recreate them.
• To view information about a measurement line, right-click it and click Info. The
measurement information is automatically displayed in the Info tab.
To Measure Distance or Area
Use the following steps to measure linear distance or area on the map.
1. Verify you have the correct units of measure selected in the Display tab of the
Options dialog box. For more information, see Setting Units of Measure Preferences.
2. On the toolbar, click the Measure tool . The pointer changes to .
3. Click point-by-point to draw a measurement line on the map. A text box displays
next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken.
Note When you pass over a point in a road, measurement line, or measurement
area to which you can snap, a yellow circle defines the snap point. Click to snap
the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object's point coordinate.
4. To end a measurement line, double-click the last point of the measurement line.
15

Street Atlas USA User Guide
OR
Click the last point of your measure line or area and then click the Measure tool on
the toolbar.
The measure line is a two-pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line is
displayed in a label at each endpoint of the line.
5. To end a measure area, hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle
displays, and then double-click the last point to the starting point. The closure area
is transparently shaded, and the area and perimeter measurements display.
Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats
These are the supported search formats. Sample coordinates are for Yarmouth, Maine.
Tip Examples of search formats are listed in the Advanced search drop-down text boxes
along with a history of your most current search criteria.
Coordinate
Format
QuickSearch
Advanced Search
Latitude/Longitude N 43 48 30, W70 9 52 N 43 48 30 W70 9 52
N 43 48.4910, W 070
09.8440
N434829.4600,
W0700950.6400
N 43 48.4910 W 070 09.8440
N434829.4600 W0700950.6400
N43-48-30, W70-9-52 N43-48-30 W70-9-52
N 43:48:29.46, W
70:9:50.64
N 43:48:29.46 W 70:9:50.64
4348, -7009 4348 -7009
4348N, 7009W 4348N 7009W
N4348, W7009 N4348 W7009
4348n, 7009w 4348n 7009w
n4348, w7009 n4348 w7009
4348 N, 7009 W 4348 N 7009 W
N 4348, W 7009 N 4348 W 7009
4348 n, 7009 w 4348 n 7009 w
n 4348 w 7009 n 4348 w 7009
434829, -700950 434829 -700950
4348.491, -7009.844 4348.491 -7009.844
4348.491, -7009.844 4348.491 -7009.844
434829.46, -700950.64 434829.46 -700950.64
16

Getting Started
43.80818333, -
70.16406667
43 48.4910 N, 70 09 50.64
W
43 48.4910 n, 70 09 50.64
w
43.80818333 -70.16406667
43 48.4910 N 70 09 50.64 W
43 48.4910 n 70 09 50.64 w
N 43 48.4910, W 70 09
50.64
N 43 48.4910
70 09 50.64 W
434829.46 N, 700950.64 W 434829.46 N 700950.64 W
43, -70 43 -70
USNG
Street Atlas USA
Plus only
19TDJ 06354 51187
19TDJ0635451187
(NAD27)*
19TDJ06355109
19TDJ064511
19TDJ0651
Same as QuickSearch
UTM/UPS 19T 0406311E 4850964N Zone 19T
Easting 0406311E
Northing 4850964N
19T 0406311 4850964
19T / 0406311 / 4850964
Zone 19T
Easting 0406311
Northing 4850964
Zone 19T
Easting 0406311
Northing 4850964
SPCS ME-W 0500490 0355150 Zone ME-W
Easting 0500490
Northing 0355150
* Use this example for USNG with non-standard datum.
Searching Tips
When you use the Quick Search subtab on the Find tab or the Route tab to search for a
location, you must enter the information in a specific format.
Tips
• Use punctuation as in the examples in the table below.
• Do not use periods.
This table shows formats for search types.
For this type of search... Use this format... Example
17

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Address Street address, City, State 100 Baxter Blvd, Portland,
ME
Street address, ZIP Code 100 Congress St, 04101
Street address, City, State,
ZIP Code
100 Congress St, Portland,
ME 04101
City City, State Atlanta, Georgia
ZIP/Postal Code Within the U.S.: ##### (5-
digit ZIP Codes only)
Within Canada: ### 6-digit
Postal Codes only)
04096
J8E756
Minor Point of Interest POI name, City, State Subway, Columbus, OH
Major Point of Interest or
Landmark
POI/landmark name
POI/landmark name, State
Mount Rushmore
Space Needle, WA
Latitude/Longitude
See Chart of Supported of Supported Coordinate Formats
For more information about the Find tab, see the Help topics under Finding a Location on
the Map.
About the Interface
Tab Area
You can access most of the application's functions from the tab area at the bottom of the
screen. To access Help for a specific tab, click the Help button on the tab. You can also
reorder the tabs, show or hide individual tabs or show or hide the tab panel.
• Map Files
• Find
• Phone Street Atlas Plus only
• XData Street Atlas Plus only
• Print
• Draw
• GPS
• Route
• Info
• NetLink
• Voice
Control Panel
The Control Panel, located to the right of the map view, displays information pertinent to
the current map view and map cursor position. It also includes zoom and map pan buttons.
You can customize your interface to show or hide the Control Panel.
18

Getting Started
Data Zoom Level—The current data zoom level of the map view; ranges
between 2-0 (maximum zoom out) and 16-0 (regular Street Atlas
maximum zoom in) or 17-0 (Street Atlas Plus maximum zoom in).
Zoom Tools—Buttons that quickly zoom out three levels, out one level, or
in one level. For more information, see Zooming In and Out.
Compass Rose—A group of nine buttons on a globe. The outer buttons
have yellow arrows; click one of the arrow buttons to pan the map in that
direction. Click the middle button to center the map on the previous map
view. This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom (up
to 256 times).
Map Rotation Tool—The arrow in the graphic indicates True North in
relation to the rotated map. Use the Map Rotation Tool to rotate the map
in any direction. You can rotate the map by clicking or dragging the square
map graphic in the direction you want or by selecting/typing the degree of
map rotation from the drop-down list.
Map Coordinates—Coordinates for the current map cursor position
display based on the units of measurement preferences chosen in the
Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Scale Bar—Indicates the distance one scale bar unit equals in the
measurement chosen under in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Overview Map
The overview map is a small map in the lower-right corner of the screen that offers a wideangle
view of your current map view area. It is approximately three data zoom-levels out
from the current map view.
Tips
• Click anywhere on the overview map and that point becomes the new map center.
This allows you to travel greater distances with each mouse click than you can within
the larger, current map view.
• Use the black view box in the overview map window to pan the map. Point anywhere
on the view box. When the pointer becomes a , drag the view box to the new
location.
19

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Toolbar
• You can show or hide toolbar options.
• You can change the order of the toolbar options.
Default Toolbar
You can also view toolbar topics in the Using the Toolbar section of the Help. When you use
Netbook Mode, the toolbar is optimized for small screen use.
Additional Toolbar Options
These button groups are hidden in the default toolbar. To show a button group, right-click
the toolbar and click the check box next to the name of the group.
Map Tools
Measure Tool
Exchange
GeoTagger
Print
Print Screen
20

Tutorials
Tutorial: Use the E-Z Nav Route Wizard
When using a GPS device with your DeLorme mapping application, the E-Z Nav route wizard
works with NavMode to make trip planning to a single destination quick and easy.To use the
E-Z Nav route wizard at any time while using Nav Mode, click the E-Z Nav button
the top right corner of the map.
in
Navigate the pages in the E-Z Nav route wizard
• Click to go back to the previous screen.
• Click to see another page of results.
• Click to see the previous page of results.
Optimize Street Atlas USA for E-Z Nav
Set your GPS preferences
Use the GPS tab on the Options dialog box to change your GPS preferences.
• Select the Start GPS with the program check box so that E-Z Nav opens when
you start Street Atlas USA
• Clear the Start GPS log check box to disable track logging. If you want to create
logs of E-Z Nav routes, leave the check box selected—you will be prompted to
save the log when you close the program.
• If you are not using a DeLorme Earthmate GPS device, you need to initialize your
device.
Set Street Atlas USA to always open with your E-Z Nav route map file
project
First, create an E-Z Nav route and save it; when prompted to save changes to E-Z Nav
Route, click Yes. Then, click the Help button on the toolbar and click Welcome
Screen. Select Open a recent project and Use selected project option at start....
Then, click OK. For more information, see Setting which Map File Opens with Street Atlas
USA.
Set GPS Radar preferences
To use GPS Radar with an E-Z Nav route, create your route and then use the Find tab to
set up your GPS Radar search. Use GPS Radar to search for points of interest (POIs) such
as gas stations, restaurants, accommodations, rest areas, and so on along your route.
See the Find Points of Interest on a Route tutorial for more information.
Use the E-Z Nav route wizard to find a location
In this tutorial, you are visiting DeLorme and want to find a good place to eat lunch.
21

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Step 1—Get ready
You have already optimized Street Atlas USA for use with E-Z Nav (see orange box above).
Plug your GPS device into your portable computer and open Street Atlas USA. The E-Z Nav
route wizard opens.
Step 2—Pick the search category
Since you don't want to go too far, leave the location setting as Near Current Location
and click Food & Restaurants. Click
to view all the categories—you can't make
up your mind, so you click the All Fast Food & Restaurants category.
22

Tutorials
Step 3—Pick a search result
The results show each restaurant with its distance from your location. Once you page
through the list of results, you decide on Bruce's Burritos and note that it's 1.5 miles from
DeLorme. Click Bruce's Burritos in the list.
Step 4—View the result on the map
On the details page, click View Map to view the location on the map before you route to it.
The map displays the search result for 15 seconds and then reverts to the details page. You
can close the map view at any time by clicking the E-Z Nav button in the top right
corner of the map. Note The map displays in 2-D even if you are in 3-D mode.
23

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Step 5—Create the route and start your trip
Once you are back on the details page, click Create Route and start navigating!
Tutorial: Find Points of Interest on a Route
24

Tutorials
Use GPS Radar to find the closest point of interest to your current location as you travel
along a route.
In this tutorial, you are creating a route on the toolbar and using NavMode to navigate with
the route. You want GPS Radar to find gas stations along your route as you travel.
Step 1—Get ready
Use the program to create a route using your current GPS location as the route start point
and an address book entry as your finish.
Step 2—Set your preferences
Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find tab in the Options dialog box.
• Select Road to calculate the distance you will have to travel by road to reach the
result.
• Select the Repeat search every... check box (required for NavMode) and select
how often you want to repeat the search.
• Select the Only in Direction of Travel check box so you don't have to back track to
make your next stop—if you're driving in a very rural area, you may not want to use
this feature because the closest point of interest may be behind you.
• Select the Enable voice reporting check box and then select what you want
reported from the Report drop-down list.
Step 3—Start the GPS
1. Connect your GPS device to your portable computer. Ensure the speakers are turned
on and loud enough for you to hear while driving.
2. Launch Street Atlas USA.
3. Make sure the NavMode button on the toolbar is on (appears indented).
25

Street Atlas USA User Guide
4. Click the GPS button on the toolbar to start your GPS.
Step 4—Pick what you want to search for
1. Click the Find tab (it is minimized at the bottom of the screen) and click GPS Radar.
2. From the Find list, select Gas Stations.
3. Click Search.
4. Minimize the tab area.
Step 5—Start driving
The computer speaks the route directions as you drive. If you are using speech recognition
software, you can ask the computer questions like, "What is the next turn?" or "Where am
I?" NavMode displays your search results in the orange bar below the map.
Tutorial: Plan a Long Distance Trip
When you are using Street Atlas USA to plan a long trip, use the many features on the
Route tab to customize your route.
Before you leave on your trip
26

Tutorials
Step 1—Create your route
Create a route—there are several ways to do this. When you create a route, you can add or
insert stops or vias if you want to travel through specific locations. In this scenario, we
created a route from Yarmouth, Maine, to Tucson, Arizona, and inserted several vias
because we want to go through specific locations.
Click the Advanced button on the Route tab to see the route details.
Tip Another thing you can do on the Advanced subtab is set your route preferences to fine
tune the way the route is created.
Step 2—Set your end of day and fuel break preferences
Click Plan Trip on the Route tab and set your preferences. Then, click Apply. Your End of
Day Breaks and Fuel Breaks are displayed on the map.
To view the estimated fuel cost, click Fuel Cost.
Step 3—Print your route map and directions
You can print your route map and directions.
1. Click the Print tab and then click Route.
2. Select your options and click View to see a preview.
Step 4—Save your map file!
Save your map file so you can make sure have everything ready when you begin your trip.
27

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Using GPS
If you are using a GPS device with your program on a portable computer to navigate the
route you created, use the following steps.
• NavMode is the default view when GPS tracking. If you want to use the tab view
when travelling, click the NavMode button on the toolbar. For more information
about NavMode and the GPS tab, see Using NavMode or GPS Tab View.
• The E-Z Nav route wizard is on by default. When planning a long trip, disable E-Z
Nav on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box.
Step 1—Get ready to travel
1. Connect your GPS device to your portable computer. Ensure the speakers are turned
on and loud enough for you to hear while driving.
2. Check your GPS preferences on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box.
3. Click the GPS button on the toolbar to start your GPS.
• If you are using a GPS device that is not a DeLorme Earthmate GPS device,
you need to initialize it.
• If your GPS location is not the same as the start location of your trip, you will
be prompted to navigate with it or hide it. Click Navigate.
4. If your map file is not open, open it.
Step 2—Optional. Find points of interest along your route
You can use the GPS Radar option on the Find tab to find points of interest along your route
as you travel.
1. Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find Tab in the Options dialog box. If you are
using NavMode, make sure the Repeat the search every... check box is selected.
2. Click the Find tab and click the GPS Radar subtab to search for your category of
interest.
If you selected the Search only in direction of travel check box in the Options
dialog box, you won't have to back track to make your next stop; however, if you're
driving in a very rural area, the closest point of interest may be behind you. For
more information, see the Find Points of Interest on a Route tutorial and Finding
Points Near Your Current Location.
Step 3—Start driving
If you have set up speech recognition software, you can ask the computer questions like,
"What is the next turn?" or "Where am I?" For more information, see Voice Overview. This
view shows the beginning of our trip using NavMode.
28

Tutorials
Tutorial: Share Maps
MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions to send to your
friends, family, and associates.
Step 1—Open the MapShare Wizard
Click the MapShare button
on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard.
Step 2—Select the type of information you want to share
Select Share the Current Map View (a static map) or Share a Route Map and
Directions and then click Next.
For this tutorial, we will share a route map and directions.
29

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Step 3—Select the route to share
Select the route file you want to share from the Available Routes drop-down list and then
click Next.
Step 4—Add a title or notes to the route map
To add a title or notes to your route map, type the appropriate information in the text boxes
and click Next.
30

Tutorials
Step 5—Add notes to the directions
Then, if you would like to add notes to display with your directions, type them in the Notes
text box and click Next.
Step 6—View upload confirmation
A message informs you that your map has been uploaded successfully to the MapShare site.
Click Next.
31

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Step 7—Preview or e-mail the route
Click E-mail the MapShare Link for Your Route Map and Directions to e-mail a link of
your route map and directions. This option is available only if an e-mail program is
detected. If an e-mail program is not detected, copy and paste the link provided into your
online e-mail program.
AND/OR
Click Preview Your Route Map and Directions to preview your route map and directions
as they appear on the MapShare site.
Note Print your route map and directions from the MapShare site by clicking Print in the
upper-right corner of the page.
Step 8—Exit the MapShare Wizard
Click Close to exit the MapShare Wizard.
32

Tutorials
Tutorial: Route with XData Points
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in
Street Atlas USA Plus.
Once you import an XData dataset, you can use the data to create a route.
Step 1—Import the dataset
Import the dataset into the XData tab. For more information, see Importing Data.
Step 2—Create a route
Assign the Start and Finish points of the route. You can assign the Start and Finish using the
Route options on the toolbar, right-click functionality, or the Route tab. For more
information, see Creating a Route.
Step 3—Select records to include as stops
Click the Query tab and select the records that you want to include as stops in the route.
Note To select multiple records at once, press and hold the CTRL key on your keyboard
while you select the individual records.
Step 4—Add Stops to route
Right-click the selected record(s), point to Route, and then click Add Stop (to add the stops
in the order they were selected in the table) or Insert Stop (to add the stops in
geographical order).
Note Use the Advanced subtab in the Route tab to reorder multiple stops.
Step 5—Calculate the route
33

Street Atlas USA User Guide
If you do not have the Auto calculate check box selected in the Route/New Edit tab, click
the Go To button on the right side of the tab or click the Calculate button in the Route tab.
The route displays on the map.
Step 6—Print the route directions
Print the directions as a Travel Package using the Route option on the Print tab.
34

Map Legend
Map Legend
The features that display on the map may display differently depending on which map colors
you chose on the Display tab of the Options dialog box. The tables below show the
symbolization of each feature, by map color.
Notes
• Not all features are available at all zoom levels.
• Not all features are available in all datasets.
• High-contrast Color features display the same as the default features (except for land,
which displays as black).
Routable Road Features
Ferry Passenger
Ferry Vehicle
Interstate Highway (can also include this symbol: )
Limited Access Road
Local Road
Major Connector, Forest Road
Minor Connector
Non Limited Access Interstate
Primary State Route
State Route (can also include this symbol: )
Toll Road
U.S./National Route (can also include this symbol: )
Unclassified Road
Unimproved Road
Land Cover
Bare Rock or Sand
Bureau of Land Management Land
Bureau of Mine Reclamation Land
Forest, evergreen
Forest, mixed
Ice or Snowfield
Indian Reservation (at data zoom level 11)
35

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Indian Reservation (at data zoom level 2 thru 10-7)
Intermittent Water
Land
Military Area (at data zoom level 11)
Military Area (at data zoom level 2 thru 10-7)
Mine or Quarry
Parks
River/Stream
Transitional Area, Lava, Salt Flats, or Mixed Barren
Water
Wetlands
Point Features
Amusements
Airport (private)
Airport (commercial public)
Airport (general aviation public)
Business (Amusement, Recreation, Specialty or Department Store)
Camping (at data zoom level 14)
Camping (at data zoom level 11 thru 13)
Cemetery
Educational Facility
Exit, with services (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11-7)
Exit, without services (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11-7)
Exit, food (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, gas (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, lodging (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, other (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Fast Food
Gas
Hospital
Lodging
Metropolitan City
36

Map Legend
National Capital (data zoom level 7 thru 10)
National Capital (data zoom levels 2 thru 6)
Point of Interest (smaller black square)
Population Center
Public Service
Religious (buildings)
Rest Area with Facilities (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11)
Rest Area with Facilities (at data zoom level 12)
Rest Area without Facilities (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11)
Rest Area without Facilities (at data zoom level 12)
Restaurants (general)
Restaurants (specialty)
Small City
State Capital
Line Features
County Boundary
Dam
Game Management District
International Boundary
Park Boundary
Pipeline
Power Line
Railroad (Abandoned)
Railroad
Runway
State Boundary
Road Edit Features
One Way, South or West
One Way, North or East
No Left Turn, South or West
No Left Turn, North or East
37

Street Atlas USA User Guide
No Right Turn, South or West
No Right Turn, North or East
No Turn, South or West
No Turn, North or East
No Way
38

Using the Toolbar
Showing/Hiding Toolbar Options
You can customize the toolbar to show the options you use most. You can also activate
toolbar options that are not turned on by default. Some toolbar options are grouped—you
can show or hide groups of buttons.
To modify the toolbar.
1. Right-click the toolbar.
Toolbar options with a selected check box next to them are displayed on the
toolbar.
2. Click an item to activate or inactivate it in the toolbar.
Reordering the Toolbar Options
To reposition the toolbar segments horizontally or vertically, just drag the dotted vertical
bar that separates each segment to the new location (left, right, up, or down).
To Create a New Map File
To create a new map file, click the New button on the toolbar. If you made changes to
the map file that is currently open, the Save Changes dialog box opens.
For more information, see Creating and Deleting Map Files.
To Open a Map File
To open an existing map file:
1. Click the Open button on the toolbar.
If you made changes to a map file that is already open, the Save Changes dialog box
opens to ask you if you want to save your changes. Note Map files have .saf
extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Map Files.
39

Street Atlas USA User Guide
The Open File dialog box opens.
Note You can also click the arrow next to the Open toolbar button to open a menu.
Then, click Open Map File.
2. Select the map file you want to view and click Open.
For more options for opening files, see Opening an Existing Map File.
To Save a Map File
To save the map file that is currently open:
1. Click the Save button on the toolbar.
The Save File dialog box opens.
2. Browse to the location where you want to save the map file.
If you want to rename the map file, type a new name in the File Name text box.
3. Click Save.
To Share Maps
To share your current map view or a route map and directions, click the MapShare button
on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard.
For information on e-mailing maps and routes with the MapShare Wizard, click the Help
button in the MapShare Wizard.
To Create a Route
To set route points using the toolbar:
1. Type the location where you want to start your route in the Start text box (next to
the green Start button).
OR
Click the green Start button and then click the location on the map where you
want to start your route.
OR
Select an address book entry, a previous location, or your current GPS position from
the Start drop-down list.
2. Type the location where you want to end your route in the Finish text box (next to
the red Finish button).
OR
Click the red Finish button and then click the location on the map where you
want to end your route.
OR
Select an address book entry or your current GPS position from the Finish dropdown
list.
3. Optional. If you want to add a stop or via to your route, click the Stop button or
the Via button and then click the location on the map where you want to add or
insert the stop or via. Repeat this step for each stop or via you want to add to your
40

Using the Toolbar
route.
Note If the Add option is selected in the Route tab, stops and vias are added in the
order they are added to the route. If the Insert option is selected in the Route tab,
stops and vias are added in the order they are approached in the route. For more
information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
4. Click the Calculate button .
Note To use the current GPS location in a route, you must connect your device to your
computer and click the GPS button
on the toolbar or on the GPS tab.
Tip Once a route is calculated, you can use the subtabs in the Route tab to view route
directions, edit a route, and more. Click the Directions subtab to view the route directions,
the Advanced subtab to display the advanced routing options, or click Back on Track to
add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Start/Stop Your GPS Connection
The GPS button on the toolbar lets you start your GPS connection if the device is not active
or stop the connection if it is active.
To start or stop your GPS connection, click the GPS button on the toolbar.
• If you are using NavMode, the GPS tab is minimized and the Control Panel is hidden,
but you can show them. For more information, see Customizing the Interface.
• If you start a connection and you are not using NavMode, the GPS tab area opens so
you can monitor your GPS status.
Note NavMode is enabled by default. If you want to use the GPS tab for your default mode,
you can disable NavMode on the GPS tab in the Options dialog.
To Use GPS NavMode
NavMode—a hands free full-screen view that you can view in 2-D or 3-D—is the default view
when you navigate or track with GPS. You can turn off NavMode to use the GPS tab.
To Turn NavMode On/Off
Click the NavMode button to turn it on or off. The button is grayed out unless you have
a GPS device plugged in or are playing back a GPS log file. When the button appears
indented
, NavMode is on.
You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and click the GPS tab.
OR
Click the Options button on the GPS tab.
2. Clear the Use NavMode check box if you do not want to use NavMode when you
start your GPS. Select the check box if you do want to start GPS in NavMode.
3. Click OK.
41

Street Atlas USA User Guide
To Open the Map Library
To open the Map Library subtab on the NetLink tab, click the Map Library
button.
To View Imagery
You can view imagery, such as aerial and satellite imagery, within the program. This data is
available separately from DeLorme and can be purchased through the NetLink tab in your
program.
Use the Imagery button and menu on the toolbar to turn imagery on and off, select
which type of imagery you want to view, and also show roads on top of the imagery (raster
data). If no raster data types are detected, the Show Roads feature is grayed out and no
data types are listed.
To Turn Raster Imagery On/Off
Click the Imagery button to toggle raster imagery on/off. When the Imagery button
appears indented, all connected imagery displays on the map. When the Imagery button
does not appear indented , no raster imagery displays on the map.
You can also turn raster imagery on/off by clicking the arrow next to the Imagery button
and selecting the Show Imagery option from the menu. A selected check box next to the
option indicates that imagery is currently displaying on the map; if the check box is cleared,
it indicates that raster imagery is currently hidden.
To Show/Hide Roads in the Raster Imagery
1. Click the arrow next to the Imagery button on the toolbar to open the
Imagery menu.
2. If a selected check box displays next to the Show Roads option, road names/labels
display in the imagery.
OR
If the check box next to the Show Roads option is cleared, road names/labels do not
display in the imagery.
3. To change the Show Roads status, click Show Roads to toggle the option.
To Change the Raster Data Type
1. Click the arrow next to the Imagery button on the toolbar to open the
Imagery menu.
All of the connected, compatible raster data types are listed under the Show Roads
and Show Imagery options.
The active raster data type has a black dot next to it. In the graphic below, Aerial
Imagery is the active raster data type.
2. To change the raster data type, click a different data type in the list.
Note Only one raster data type is displayed at a time.
42

Using the Toolbar
To Get Information About a Location
Use the Information button on the toolbar to click a point, symbol, feature,
measurement line, track, or area on the map to identify it and view detailed information
about it.
The Information button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Information.
Use the following steps to get information about a particular map feature.
1. Click the Information button.
2. Click the map feature you want information for, such as a road, town, measurement
line, waypoint, track, draw symbol, or point of interest.
The Info tab opens and displays a list of information categories.
Note Descriptive information may include a name or feature type, length/area,
ZIP/Postal Code, town name, county name, state/province, coordinates, and
Standard Industrial Classification categories.
3. Click the plus sign next to each of the information categories to expand the category
to view more detailed information.
OR
Right-click in the information box and click Expand All to expand all of the
information categories. Right-click in the information box again and click Collapse
All to minimize all of the information categories.
4. Optional. Repeat steps 1–3 to get information about another location.
5. Optional. Right-click in the information box and click Print to print your map feature
information.
Notes
• You can also get information about a location using the right-click option. Just rightclick
the location and click Info.
• The status bar (located above the tab area) displays draw object type, draw file
information, point of interest name (if applicable), street name/address, highway, city,
state/province, and ZIP/Postal Code information for the map location that your cursor is
positioned on.
• Some map features (such as campgrounds, national scenic/historic trail information
centers, and state parks) display with a blue outline at higher data zoom levels. The
blue outline indicates that the feature has a hyperlink to its website. To open the
hyperlink, right-click the feature and then click Open Hyperlink OR click the URL in the
Info tab.
43

Street Atlas USA User Guide
To Choose Options
To open the Options dialog box, click the Options button
Options dialog box to set preferences for program options.
The Options dialog has the following tabs:
• GPS
• Voice
• Map Features (Basic and Custom)
• Display
• Keyboard Shortcuts
• Find (GPS Radar)
on the toolbar. Use the
An Options button that opens the Options dialog box is also available on the Find > GPS
Radar, and GPS tabs.
To open the Options menu, click the arrow next to the Options button
toolbar. The following menu options are available:
• Options—Opens the Options dialog box.
on the
• Tab Manager—Opens the Tab Manager dialog box where you can show or hide
individual tabs and reorder tabs.
• Change File Management— Opens the Change File Management dialog box, where
you can view or change your file management option. Note This option is available
only for regular Street Atlas USA users.
• Netbook Mode—Allows you to turn the Netbook Mode on or off. If the mode is
turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Netbook Mode to turn it on or
off. For more information, see Using Small-screen Devices.
You can also customize your interface:
• Show Tab Area Panel—Allows you to show or hide all the tabs. If Show All Tabs is
turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Show Tab Area Panel to show
or hide the tab area.
• Show Control Panel—Allows you to show or hide the Control Panel. If Show Control
Panel is turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Show Control Panel to
show or hide it.
To Add Images to a GPS Location
To open the GeoTagger Wizard, where you can combine images with GPS information on the
map, click the GeoTagger button on the toolbar.
The Geotagger button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Geotagger.
For more information, see Getting Started with GeoTagger.
To Grab and Pan the Map
To drag and pan the map in any direction, click the Map Panning button
toolbar.
on the
44

Using the Toolbar
The Map Panning button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Map Panning.
To Measure Distance
Use the following steps to measure linear distances and perimeter/area on the map. For
more information, see Measuring Distance and Area.
The Measure tool is hidden by default:to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the menu
and click Measure Tool.
1. Click the Measure tool on the toolbar.
2. Click point-by-point to draw a measurement line on the map. A text box displays
next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken.
Note When you pass over a point in a road, measurement line, or measurement
area to which you can snap, a yellow circle defines the snap point. Click to snap
the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object's point coordinate.
Press and hold the ALT key on your keyboard to disable snapping.
3. To end a measurement line, double-click the last point of the measurement line. The
measure line displays as a two-pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line
displays in a label at each endpoint of the line.
4. To end a measure area, hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle
displays and then double-click the last point to the starting point. The perimeter
measurements display.
To Print
To print a map using the current settings in the Print tab, click the Print button on the
toolbar.
The Print button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the menu
and click Print.
For more information, see Printing a Map.
To Print the Map Screen
To print the current view as it displays on the screen, click the Print Screen button on
the toolbar.
The Print Screen button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the
menu and click Print Screen.
45

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
Customizing the Interface
You can customize the interface for your application by hiding the tab panel area and the
Control Panel. If you optimized your installation for use with a netbook, you can turn
Netbook Mode on or off.
To Customize the Interface
1. Click the arrow next to the Options button on the toolbar.
2. To turn on an option when it is not selected, click it to select the check box.
OR
To turn off an option when it is selected, click it to clear the check box.
• Use Tab Manager to show or hide individual tabs or reorder tabs.
• Use Show Tab Area Panel to show or hide the entire tab area.
• Use Show Control Panel to show or hide the Control Panel.
• Use Netbook Mode to turn the optimized small-screen device view on or off. For
more information, see Using Small-screen Devices.
Notes
• You can also use keyboard shortcuts to customize the interface.
• Your settings are saved until you change them.
• Clicking Options in the menu opens the Options dialog box.
Displaying Basic Map Features
You can show or hide basic map features on your map.
You can also customize map features and customize the interface.
Notes
• If you cannot make changes to the basic preference check boxes, verify the Use
Custom Map Features check box is not selected.
• Click Use Defaults to change the map feature settings to the default preferences.
• The map features available are based on the Map Colors option you are using.
To Select Basic Map Feature Preferences
47

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to change the basic map feature preferences. Changes made to the
map view display almost immediately after selection.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Map Features tab.
3. Select the check box next to the map features you want to display on the map.
OR
Clear the check box next to the map features you want to hide on the map.
• Grids
The Grids option can be used to identify coordinate points on the map. Grid
lines automatically adjust for the data zoom level of your map.
• Map Center Crosshair
The map center crosshair indicates the map center at any data zoom level.
• Exits
View exits on primary limited access roads, interstates, and toll roads.
Available at data zoom level 10-0 or greater.
• One Ways
One ways display as bright green triangles on roads, pointing toward the
direction of travel (most noticeable in large cities). They are available at data
zoom level 13-0 or greater.
• Places (Minor)
View smaller towns, suburbs, locales, and natural features. Zoom levels vary.
• Roads (Minor)
View secondary roads, local and rural routes, trails, and railroads. Zoom
levels vary.
• Points of Interest
• Major—View many different points of interest, including recreational
areas, public safety, rest areas, and more.
• Minor—View general points of interest including educational,
technology, government, and religious buildings/locations.
• Business (Major)—View many different travel-related points of
interest including hospitals, camping, restaurants, and more.
• Business (Minor)—View general points of interest including small
shops and food stores, laundromats, and golfing.
• ZIP-Postal Codes
ZIP/Postal Code boundaries display at data zoom level 8-0 and greater, with
ZIP/Postal Code labels displaying at data zoom level 10-0 and greater.
• Town Borders
• View town borders at data zoom level 10-0 and greater for the
following states:
Arkansas
Connecticut
Illinois
Louisiana
Maine
Maryland
Mississippi
Missouri
Nebraska
North
Carolina
North
Vermont
Virginia
Washington
48

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
Indiana
Iowa
Kansas
Massachusetts
Michigan
Minnesota
New
Hampshire
New
Jersey
New York
Dakota
Ohio
Pennsylvania
Rhode
Island
DC
West
Virginia
Wisconsin
South
Dakota
•
• County Borders
View shaded outlines of U.S. counties at data zoom levels 7-0 or greater.
• International Labels
View country labels at data zoom levels 2-0 through 4-0.
• Urban Area Color
Displays a shaded map area in populated regions at data zoom levels 9-0 and
10-0.
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences
You can change the display of a wide variety of map features so you can customize your
map to meet your specific needs. You can even customize which POIs display.
To Set Custom Map Features
This is an advanced feature that lets you create a specific, custom set of map features for
your map display from hundreds of options. Note that changes are not visible until you click
the Done button.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Map Features tab.
3. Select the Use Custom Map Features check box and then click Customize
Features to display the custom options.
Note Custom map feature selections override selections in the basic features list.
4. To quickly search for a particular type of feature, type the name of the item in the
Search text box.
A list of matching keywords displays and corresponding feature types are listed in
the Search Results window. Results for the number of keywords and types found
also display.
A selected check box indicates the feature displays on the map.
• Select/clear the individual feature check box to show or hide that feature.
• Click the small None button to the right of the Search Results window to
show none of the features listed.
49

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Click the small All button to the right of the Search Results window to
display all of the features listed.
• Click Only to display only those features listed in the Search Results
window.
• Click Exclude to display all features except those listed in the Search
Results window.
5. To use the map feature tree to select which POIs display on the map, click the plus
signs to expand the individual branches. A selected check box indicates the feature
type displays on the map.
Note Some branches expand further than others. Selecting/clearing a check box at
a certain branch of the tree shows/hides all the items below that level.
• Select/clear the individual map feature check box to show or hide that
feature.
• Click All to select all map features in the program.
• Click None to select none of the types in the program.
Note A small number of features cannot be turned off. They are part of the
base map display and cannot be changed. This is why certain levels on the
tree remain unavailable (appear dimmed or gray).
6. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Notes
• When you save the current map file, the following feature preferences are saved in
reference to map features:
o Major map features preferences
o Individual custom feature preferences
o When you create a new map file, the current map settings are used. Click Use Defaults
to return to the default settings.
Changing the Map Colors
When you use a laptop computer while traveling, it can be difficult to see the map display
on your screen. This can be especially true at night or on a bright sunny day. Changing your
default map colors to high-contrast map colors can make your map display easier to see.
To Change the Map Colors
Use the following steps to change the map display.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. From the Map Colors drop-down list, select High-Contrast Colors to make the
map display darker for improved in-vehicle visibility. Select Default Colors to use
the standard display.
50

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Changing the Map Magnification Level
If you want to change the size of the map image, but not change the degree of geographic
detail on the map, use the magnification settings in the Options dialog box.
To Change the Map Magnification
Use the following steps to change the map magnification.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select a magnification percentage (50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 175%, or
200%) from the Magnification drop-down list.
Note Although the size of the image changes, the degree of geographic detail does
not.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Changing How POIs Display on the Map
You can change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols display on the map.
To Change the Data Zoom Level for Large POI Symbols
Use the following steps to change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols are
displayed on the map.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the data zoom level from the Large Symbols At drop-down list.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Notes
• The appearance of a POI many change at different data zoom levels.
• The number of points of interest that displays is dependent on the basic map
features you selected on the Map Features tab in the Options dialog box. For more
information, see Displaying Basic Map Features.
51

Street Atlas USA User Guide
This table shows the actions that may happen if you display major and minor POIs.
If you
view large
symbols
at data
zoom
level...
You will see
the following
information
at data
zoom level
13-0
You will see
the following
information
at data
zoom level
14-0
You will see
the following
information
at data
zoom level
15-0
You will see
the following
information
at data
zoom level
16-0
You will see
the following
information
at data
zoom level
17-0
Regular Street
Atlas
Street Atlas
Plus
14 names and
small square
symbols
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
15 small
squares only
name of the
POI and a
small square
symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
16 N/A small square
symbols
only
name of the
POI and a
small square
symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
16
(Regular
Street
Atlas USA)
N/A
small square
symbols and
some names
of POIs
name of the
POI and a
small square
symbol
name of the
POI and a
small square
symbol
name of the
POI and the
large symbol
17 (Street
Atlas USA
Plus)
Setting Units of Measure Preferences
You can change the units of measure used to represent how coordinate formats, distance,
datum, and bearing listings display. Changing these preferences affects how units of
measure display in several areas of the program: such as on the map and in the Control
Panel.
As you change your unit of measure preferences, a description of each choice displays in the
information box (in the center of the Options dialog box) immediately after you select it.
To Change the Coordinate Preferences
Changing the coordinate preferences affects the:
• Coordinates display on the Control Panel.
• Coordinate MapNotes.
• Grid label display, if Grids are selected in Map Features.
• Any other place where coordinates display or print.
Use the following steps to change how coordinate measurement units display.
52

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the coordinate display format from the Coordinates drop-down list.
• Degrees
• Degrees, Minutes
• Deg, Min, Sec
• USNG (United States National Grid) Street Atlas USA® Plus only
5. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Note The Datum displayed is automatically adjusted when your change your
coordinate preference.
To Change the Distance Preferences
Distance preferences affect how distance and areas display throughout the program.
Use the following steps to change the measurement units for distance and area.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click Options.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the measurement from the Measurements drop-down list.
• Statute Miles (statute feet are used for small distances)
• Kilometers (meters are used for small distances)
• Nautical Miles/Feet (statute feet are used for small distances)
• Nautical Miles/Meters (meters are used for small distances)
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
To Change the Bearing Preferences
Bearing listings are created as the result of creating route directions in the Route tab or
from an Advanced (Distance From) search in the Find tab. Bearing refers to the compass
direction of a given object measured clockwise in degrees (for example, 30°) or nearest
compass point (for example, NNE) and indicated from True North or Magnetic North.
Notes:
• Magnetic declination is the difference in degrees between True North and Magnetic
North at a specific location.
• The bearing setting does not affect map appearance.
Use the following steps to change the bearing.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click Options.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the bearing from the Bearing drop-down list.
• True North—The direction to the north pole. This is the default setting.
53

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Magnetic North—The direction that a compass needle points.
4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas
You can horizontally and vertically resize the primary (right) map, secondary (left) map, tab
area, and overview map with the map and tab area resize tools.
Notes
• The tab and overview map window size does not change when you choose another
tab.
• Some tab areas that provide search results automatically resize depending on the
number of results.
• Street Atlas USA displays both maps only when you are using GPS in GPS tab view.
To use this feature, select the Auto-display GPS Overview check box on the GPS
Settings tab in the Options dialog box.
• You can also hide the tab area panel.
To Resize the Map and Tab Area Using the Drag Method
Use the drag method to horizontally or vertically resize these areas.
1. Point to the frame area between the tab and overview map windows. The pointer
becomes a .
OR
Point to the horizontal edge of the tab/main map window. The pointer becomes a
.
2. Drag to resize.
3. To cancel the resize while dragging, press the ESC key on your keyboard. The size
just prior to this resize is restored.
To Resize the Map Area Using the Resize Tools
The map resize tool runs perpendicular to the tab area. If the secondary and primary maps
are both displaying, the resize tool is the bar that separates them. When the bar is moved
all the way to the left of the map, only the primary map displays. When the bar is moved all
the way to the right of the map, only the secondary map displays.
There are several methods you can use to resize the map area:
• Drag the bar left to expose the area of the primary map you want to see.
• Drag the bar right to expose the area of the secondary map you want to see.
• Click the right arrow on the resize tool once to move the secondary map 1/4 of the
screen width. You can repeat this step until the primary map is no longer visible.
• Click the left arrow on the resize tool once to move the primary map 1/4 of the
screen width. You can repeat this step until the secondary map is no longer visible.
• Double-click the bar above the right arrow to show only the secondary map.
• Double-click the bar below the left arrow to show only the primary map.
• Double-click the bar between the right and left arrows to display an equal percentage
of both the secondary and primary maps.
54

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
To Resize the Tab and Map Area Using the Resize Tools
There are two tab area resize tools. The horizontal resize tool is located above the tab area
and lets you adjust the height of the tab area. The vertical resize tool is located between the
tab area and the overview map lets you resize the width of the tab area.
Using the Horizontal Resize Tool
• Drag the horizontal bar up/down to expose the tab area you want to see.
• Click the up arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally increase the
tab height. You can repeat this step until the top of the tab area is flush with the
bottom of the compass rose in the control panel.
• Click the down arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally decrease the
tab height. You can repeat this step until only the tab names display.
• Double-click the bar to the right of the up arrow to expand the tab height to its
maximum percentage (if the tab height is at the default mode or higher).
Note If the tab area is below the default mode, double-click the bar to return the
tab height to its default percentage.
• Double-click the bar to the left of the down arrow to decrease the tab height to its
minimum percentage (if the tab height is at the default mode).
Note If the tab area is above the default mode, double-click the bar to return the
tab height to its default percentage.
• Double-click the bar between the up and down arrows to return the tab height to its
default view.
Using the Vertical Resize Tool
• Drag the vertical bar left to expose the area of the overview map you want to see.
• Drag the vertical bar right to expose the tab area you want to see.
• Click the right arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab
width. You can repeat this stop until the overview map is no longer exposed.
• Click the left arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the
width of the overview map. You can repeat this step until the tab area is no longer
exposed.
• Double-click the bar above the right arrow to show only the tab area.
• Double-click the bar below the left arrow to show only the overview map.
• Double-click the bar between the right and left arrows to return the tab and overview
maps to their default views.
Showing or Hiding Tabs
The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by showing or hiding
individual tabs. You can access Tab Manager:
• During installation
• After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu
• From the Start menu
Notes
• If you use Tab Manager while the program is open, you must exit and restart the
program to view the tab changes.
55

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• To show or hide the entire tab area panel, click the arrow next to the Options
button
on the toolbar. If the tab area is showing and you want to hide it,
click Show Tab Area Panel to clear the check box next to it. If the tab area is
hidden and you want to show it, click Show Tab Area Panel to select the check
box.
To Show Individual Tabs
Use the following steps to show tabs using Tab Manager.
1. Open Street Atlas USA, click the arrow next to the Options button on the
toolbar, and select Tab Manager from the menu.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs > DeLorme> Street Atlas...>Tools,
and then click Tab Manager.
2. Select the check box next to each tab you want to display in the program.
Note Click Default to show all the tabs in the program in the default order.
3. Click OK.
4. Exit Street Atlas USA.
5. Open Street Atlas USA.
To Hide Individual Tabs
Hiding tabs may significantly increase the startup speed of Street Atlas USA.
Use the following steps to hide tabs using Tab Manager.
1. Open Street Atlas USA, click the arrow next to the Options button on the
toolbar, and select Tab Manager from the menu.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme> Street Atlas...> Tools,
and then click Tab Manager.
2. Clear the check box next to each tab you want to hide in the program.
OR
Click Minimum. Only the required tabs will display in the program.
Note Find, Map Files, Info, and NetLink are required tabs and cannot be hidden.
3. Click OK.
4. Exit Street Atlas USA.
5. Open Street Atlas USA.
Importing/Exporting Tab Manager Preferences
Tab Manager includes a feature that allows you to share your custom tab manager
preferences with other Street Atlas USA users.
To Import Tab Manager Preferences
Use the following steps to import another user's Tab Manager preferences.
1. If your application is open, click the arrow next to the Options button on
the toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
56

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
From the Start menu, point to Programs > DeLorme > Street Atlas... > Tools
and then click Tab Manager.
2. Click File and then click Import.
The Import Tab Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the location of the configuration (preferences) file, select it, and then click
Open.
Tab Manager displays with the preferences saved in the imported configuration file.
4. Click OK to close Tab Manager.
5. Exit your application.
6. Open your application.
To Export Tab Manager Preferences
Use the following steps to export your Tab Manager preferences as a configuration file.
1. If your application is open, click the arrow next to the Options button on
the toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs > DeLorme > Street Atlas... > Tools,
and then click Tab Manager.
2. Click File and then click Export.
The Export Tab Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Type a name for the configuration (preferences) file in the File Name text box and
then click Save. Configuration files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme
Docs\Configuration.
4. Click OK to close Tab Manager.
Reordering the Tabs
Use the Tab Manager feature to customize your program by reordering tabs. You can access
Tab Manager:
• During installation
• After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu
• From your computer's Start menu
Note If you use Tab Manager to make changes while the program is open, you must exit
and restart the program to view the tab changes.
To Reorder the Tabs
Use the following steps to reorder the tabs with Tab Manager.
1. Open Street Atlas USA, click the arrow next to the Options button on the
toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme> Street Atlas...>Tools, and
then click Tab Manager.
2. Click the tab you want to reorder to highlight it.
3. Click the up arrow or the down arrow to move the tab to the new position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want to reorder.
57

Street Atlas USA User Guide
5. Optional. Click Default to cancel the reordering process and use the default tab
order (showing all available tabs).
6. Click OK.
7. Exit Street Atlas USA.
8. Open Street Atlas USA.
58

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
Your application comes with the following DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes:
• Desktop Mapping
• In-vehicle Navigation
You cannot edit DeLorme schemes, but you can create custom schemes that you can edit.
You can create as many additional custom schemes as you need.
To Select a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
Use the following steps to select a keyboard shortcut scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select a scheme from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click Apply to activate the selected scheme.
Creating a New Custom Scheme
You can create a custom keyboard shortcut scheme for different program uses.
To Create a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to create a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Click File and then click New.
The Scheme drop-down list is completed with Custom Scheme# (where # indicates
the incremental number for the number of custom scheme files you have created).
Note If you want to rename the new scheme file, click File, click Rename, and then
type a new name in the Scheme text box. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard
when finished. The new name displays.
4. Assign keyboard shortcuts for the commands that are listed.
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme
There are three DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes that you cannot edit; however, you
can create a custom scheme that you can edit with Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options
dialog box.
To Assign Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme
59

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to edit a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select a custom scheme from the Scheme drop-down list.
Note You cannot edit DeLorme schemes.
4. Select the List option.
5. From the Commands drop-down list, select the command grouping to which you
want to assign shortcuts. If you want assign shortcuts to several groupings, select
All Commands.
6. Click to select the command to which you want to assign a shortcut.
7. Click inside the Customize Shortcut text box.
8. Press the shortcut key combination on your keyboard that you want to assign for
that command.
9. Click Assign. The shortcut for that command changes to the combination you
assigned and displays as "pending."
10. Repeat the steps for each command you want to assign.
11. Click Apply to save the changes.
OR
Click OK to save the changes and close the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Cancel to cancel your pending changes and close the Options dialog box.
Notes
• To sort the command list view, click a heading (Group, Command, or Shortcut).
• You cannot change the following keyboard shortcut combinations:
o ALT+F4 (Close Window)
o F1 (Help)
o ALT+F1 (Help Menu)
o SHIFT+F10 (Context Menu)
o CTRL+C (Copy)
o CTRL+V (Paste)
o CTRL+X (Cut)
o CTRL+Y (Redo)
o CTRL+Z (Undo)
o ALT+M (Set Focus on Map)
o You cannot use the following keys when assigning shortcuts:
o Windows Key
o Application Key
o Print Screen
o Scroll Lock
o Sleep
o Pause/Break
60

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Enter
Caps Lock
Num Lock
Spacebar
Insert
Backspace
Multi-media Keys
You cannot assign a letter or number on its own. For example, you cannot assign a
keyboard shortcut with the number 3; you must use a modifier (such as CTRL or ALT)
with letters and numbers.
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme
You cannot edit DeLorme schemes; however, you can create a copy of a DeLorme scheme
that you can modify to fit your needs.
To Customize a DeLorme Scheme
Use the following steps to customize a DeLorme scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the DeLorme scheme you want to copy from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Copy.
The active scheme changes to Copy of Desktop Mapping#, Copy of In-vehicle
Navigation#, Copy of 3-D Navigation#, etc. (depending on the DeLorme scheme you
chose to copy).
5. Assign keyboard shortcuts for the copied scheme.
6. Optional. Rename the scheme.
Renaming a Custom Scheme
Custom schemes can be renamed to whatever name you choose. You cannot rename
DeLorme schemes.
To Rename a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to rename a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the custom scheme you want to rename from the Scheme drop-down list.
61

Street Atlas USA User Guide
4. Click File and then click Rename.
The Scheme text box becomes active.
5. Type the name in the Scheme text box.
6. Click Apply. The new name displays.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard. The new name displays.
OR
Press the ESC key on your keyboard to keep the old name.
Deleting a Custom Scheme
Once you have created a custom scheme, you can delete it at any time. You cannot delete
DeLorme schemes.
To Delete a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to delete a custom keyboard shortcut scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the custom scheme you want to delete from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Delete.
5. Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to delete the scheme.
Importing a Custom Scheme
You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users.
To Import a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to import a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Click File and then click Import.
The Import Scheme File dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the location where you saved the .keyscheme file, select it, and then click
Open.
The imported file is now your active scheme.
Exporting a Custom Scheme
You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users.
62

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
To Export a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to export a custom scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the scheme you want to export from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Export.
The Export Scheme File dialog box opens.
5. Type a name in the File Name text box, browse to the location where you want to
save the .keyscheme file, and then click Save.
Searching For Commands
The Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box has a Search feature that lets you
search for a specific command or command group.
Note You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to
sort by (Group, Command, or Shortcut).
To Search For a Command or Command Group
Use the following steps to search for a command or command group.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the Search option.
4. In the Commands text box, begin typing the name of the command or command
group you are searching for. As you type, the list box under the Commands text box
displays word matches.
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme
The Reference Card option in the Keyboard Shortcuts tab lets you view a complete list of all
of the scheme's shortcut keys.
To View a List of Shortcut Keys
Use the following steps to view a list of shortcut keys for a scheme.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
63

Street Atlas USA User Guide
3. Select the scheme that contains the shortcut keys you want to view from the
Scheme drop-down list.
4. Optional. To sort the list view, click the heading you want to sort by (Group,
Command, or Shortcut).
5. Click Reference Card.
The list displays in your default Web browser and is sorted by the same column you
selected in step 3.
6. Optional. Print the list from your Web browser.
Print a reference card from your web browser
• Use the Print Preview functionality in your web browser to see if the list will
display as you want it to. If you do not like the way the list looks in the preview
(for example, the list prints without grid lines in the table or does not print in
color), change the advanced print settings in your Web browser.
• If you want to remove the header and footer text from the printout, from the File
menu, select Page Setup. Remove the text and the header and footer text boxes
and then click OK.
• Changes made to the browser's advanced print settings and page setup affect the
printing of all web pages.
64

Viewing Map Data
Saving Data to Your Hard Drive
If you did not install the Street Atlas USA map data to your computer's hard drive during
installation, you can do so anytime. Saving data to your hard drive makes it readily
available and improves performance.
To Save Street Atlas USA Data to Your Hard Drive
Use the following steps to save Street Atlas USA data to your hard drive.
1. Close all programs on your computer.
2. Use your computer’s Control Panel to locate the program and click Change. The
Program Maintenance screen opens.
OR
Insert the Street Atlas USA DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. Browse to the DVD drive
on your computer and view the contents. Double-click setup.exe.
The Program Maintenance screen opens.
3. Ensure Modify is selected and click Next.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation.
5. When prompted, click Finish.
If you did not install the Street Atlas USA map data to your computer's hard drive during
installation, you can do so anytime. Saving data to your hard drive makes it readily
available and improves performance.
Connecting Data
Only connected, compatible data displays in Street Atlas USA. You can improve performance
by saving the data to your hard drive.
To Connect Data
Use the following steps to connect a dataset.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Street Atlas Plus only: Click Add and then click Data Locations.
The Data Locations dialog box opens and displays a list of the of the data sources on
your system.
Regular Street Atlas USA only: If you are using simplified file management, click
File and then click Data Locations.
The Data Locations dialog box opens and displays a list of each of the data sources
on your system.
OR
If you are using advanced file management, click Add and then click Data
Locations.
Note See Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management for more information.
3. If the dataset you want to view displays in the list, ensure its check box is selected.
AND/OR
If the dataset you want to view does not display in the list, click Add, select the data
folder where the dataset is located from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and click
OK.
65

Street Atlas USA User Guide
4. Click Done when finished.
Note To remove a data source from the Data Locations list, select the data source and click
Remove.
Viewing Imagery
Your purchase of Street Atlas USA entitles you to free imagery and data from NetLink.
To learn how to view imagery and data, see To View Imagery.
Showing Roads in Raster Data
Raster data, such as aerial and satellite data, is image-based and does not provide typical
map information, such as street names, route numbers, and so on. Street Atlas USA has a
Show Roads feature that lets you overlay this type of map information onto raster data.
For more information, see To View Imagery.
To Show Roads and Text Labels in Raster Data
Use the following steps to show road names, numbers, etc. on raster data.
1. Click the arrow next to the Imagery button on the toolbar.
When Show Roads displays in the shortcut menu with a check mark next to it,
roads display in the raster data. When Show Roads displays in the menu without a
check mark next to it, roads do not display in the raster data.
2. Click Show Roads to toggle the option on/off.
66

Using Map Files
Map Files Overview
You can save all of the work that you have done as a single map File so you can open it
again later. You can create various map views and save each in a different map file, if
desired. In this way, you can save separate views of often-viewed areas at your preferred
zoom level and other settings. Then, open them as you need them using the Map Files tab.
What is a Map File?
A Map File consists of the map center coordinates, the current data zoom level, the current
magnification, rotation, preferences, and links to routes or draw layers you have added to it.
As you create routes and draw layers, they are added to the currently selected map file.
Map files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Map Files.
Each associated file is saved in its respective folder in the C:\DeLorme Docs directory. For
example, a draw layer is saved in C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw.
Set the Map File Street Atlas USA Opens When you Start the Program
Use the Welcome screen to set how Street Atlas USA opens map files. You can create a new
map file each time the program opens OR open the file you last used.
Use Draw Layers and Routes in Another Map File
After creating routes or adding your own roads, you may not want to do all of the work
again in another map file. You can share routes and draw layers between map files using
the Add button in the Map Files tab.
Send Routes or Draw Layers to Another Street Atlas USA User
You can package map files, including their routes and draw layers, into one transfer file. The
transfer file facilitates e-mailing, copying map file information to other computers and
copying map files between DeLorme programs.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Creating and Deleting Map Files
You can create various map views and save each in a different map file.
To Create a New Map File
67

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to create a new map file.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File and then click New.
OR
Click the New File button .
3. Click the Save button on the tab. Map Files have .saf extensions and are saved
by default in the C:\DeLorme Docs\Map Files directory.
OR
Click File and then click Save As to rename the map file.
Note You can also use the toolbar to create and save map files.
To Delete a Map File
Use the following steps to delete a map file.
1. Open a map file.
2. From the Map Files tab, click File, point to Current View, and click File Info.
3. Browse to the file location on your computer specified under Directory in the Map
Files tab area.
4. Select the file.
5. From your computer's File menu, select Delete.
6. Click Yes at the Delete File confirmation message.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Opening an Existing Map File
You can create various map views and save each in a different map file. You can view your
map files by opening them one at a time.
To Open a Map File
Use the following steps to open a map file.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File and then click Open.
OR
Click the Open button on the tab.
3. Double-click the map file. The last saved map view for that map file displays.
OR
68

Using Map Files
Click the map file to select it and then click Open. The last saved map view for that
map file displays.
You can also:
• Open a map file from the Welcome Screen.
• Open a map file by clicking the Open button on the toolbar.
• Open a map file by dragging and dropping it into Street Atlas USA from Windows
Explorer.
• View the most recently saved map files by clicking File, Recent Files, and then clicking
the map file you want to open on the Map Files tab.
• Click the arrow next to the toolbar button to open a menu. Then, click Open Map File
to open the Open File dialog box OR click a recently saved map file in the list.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Setting which Map File Opens with Street Atlas USA
By default, when Street Atlas USA opens, the Welcome Screen appears. From the Welcome
Screen, you can create a new map file project or you can open a recent map file project—if
the file you want to use is not listed, you can browse to it.
You can also set the program to hide the Welcome Screen on startup and always use the
selected map file project option. If you select the "recent" option, the most recently opened
file is opened the next time you start the program. You can easily open an existing map file
or create a new map file at any time.
The Welcome Screen is always available—click the Help button
click Welcome Screen.
on the toolbar and
69

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Saving a Map File
Use the Map Files tab to save each of your map files quickly and easily using one of the
following methods:
• Click File and then click Save or click the Save button .
o If you have not saved the map file before, the Save File dialog box opens.
Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save.
o If you have saved the map file before, the Save dialog box opens. All of the
changes made to the current project display as a check list. Select the check
box next to each change you want to save and clear the check box next to
each change you do not want to save. Click Yes to save the selected changes,
click No to save the file without the changes, or click Cancel to cancel the
saving process.
• Click File and then click Save As.
The Save File dialog box opens. Type a file name in the File Name text box and click
Save.
You can also click the Save button
Editing a Map File
on the toolbar.
As you create new routes and draw objects, they are added to the current map file. You can
also pan and zoom the map as needed, and then save all these changes.
To Add/Delete Files Contained in a Map File
Use the following steps to add or delete specific files contained in a particular map file from
the Map Files tab.
1. Open a map file.
70

Using Map Files
2. Click File, click Current View, and then click Contents to view the contents of the
map file.
• To add a file, click Add and then click Draw Files or Route Files. Then
select the file you want to add to the current map file.
Note If a file is added to a map file and then changed later, the file is
updated in every map file it has been added to.
• To remove a route or draw file from a map file, select that file and then click
Remove.
Note This process does not delete the file; it just removes it from the current
map file.
3. Click File and then click Save.
OR
Click the Save button . Map files have .saf extensions and are saved by default in
the C:\DeLorme Docs\Map Files directory.
Note Under the tree menu, you can use the check box next to each draw or route file to
display or hide it in the current map view.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Creating Transfer Files
A map file is made up of several different files; for example route, draw, and waypoint files.
A map file and its contents can be packaged into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate e-mail or copying. Transfer files do not include map data.
To Create a Transfer File
Use the following steps to create a transfer file.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Open the map file you want to create as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Create.
The Create Transfer File dialog box opens.
Street Atlas USA Plus only If your file contains links to other files, you can select
to maintain part of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive
location or choose not to include the directory. For more information, see Creating
Transfer Files with Hyperlinked Files.
4. In the File Name text box, type the file name.
Note Transfer files have .dmt extensions and are saved by default in the
C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files directory by default. Browse to another location if
you want to save the file somewhere else.
71

Street Atlas USA User Guide
5. Click Create. Your file is created and saved in the specified location.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Creating Transfer Files with Hyperlinked Files
This Help topic describes a feature that is available only in Street Atlas
USA Plus.
When you create a transfer file containing hyperlinked files, you can select to maintain part
of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive location or choose not to
include the directory.
To Maintain the Directory Structure When Creating a Transfer File with
Hyperlinked Files
Use the following steps to create a transfer file with hyperlinked files.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Open the map file you want to create as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Create.
The Select Hyperlinked Files dialog box opens.
72

Using Map Files
4. Verify the Include Hyperlink Files for Transfer check box is selected.
If you do not want to include hyperlink files in your transfer file, clear this check box
and go to step 8.
5. Under File Options, select Maintain Directory Info to save the directory structure
of the hyperlinked files.
If you do not want to include the directory information for the hyperlinked files in the
transfer file, select Do Not Include Directory Info and go to step 7.
6. Type the common base directory location of the hyperlinked files (up to the folder
location that you want to maintain) in the text box.
OR
Click the Browse button and browse to the common base directory location.
7. Under Select Files to Be Included, clear the check box next to each file you do not
want to include in your transfer file.
8. Click OK.
The Create Transfer File dialog box opens.
9. In the File Name text box, type the file name.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions and are saved by default in the C:\Transfer Files
directory. Browse to another location if you want to save the file somewhere else.
10. Click Create.
Your file is created and saved in the specified location.
Importing Transfer Files
You can package a map file and its contents into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate e-mailing or copying. You can also import transfer files, allowing you to share your
map files with other DeLorme users.
73

Street Atlas USA User Guide
You can import a transfer file with or without attached hyperlink files. When you create a
transfer file with hyperlinked files, you can choose to maintain the directory information of
common files. By doing this, the recipient of the transfer file can keep a similar directory
structure as the creator. This is helpful when a transfer file is shared and updated between
users.
Note Transfer files do not include map data.
To Import a Transfer File
Use the following steps to import a transfer file, including transfer files that have been e-
mailed to you by other DeLorme users.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Import.
The Import Transfer File dialog box opens. The C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files
directory is the default location. Browse to another location if you want to save the
file somewhere else. Transfer files have .dmt extensions.
3. Click a file to select it.
The name displays in the File Name text box.
4. Click Import to finish the import process.
The imported map file opens and displays in the map view.
To Import a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files
Use the following steps to import a transfer file that includes hyperlinked file attachments.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Import.
The Import Transfer File dialog box opens. The C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files
directory is the default location. Browse to another location if you want to save the
file somewhere else. Transfer files have .dmt extensions.
3. Click a file to select it.
The name displays in the File Name text box.
4. Click Import.
The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.
5. Select the folder where you want to save the hyperlinked files.
C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files is the default location. Browse to another location if
you want to save the file somewhere else.
6. Click OK.
The imported map file opens and displays in the map view.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
74

Using Map Files
E-mailing a Transfer File
You can package a map file and its contents into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate e-mailing or copying. Note Transfer files do not include map data.
To E-mail a Transfer File
This procedure creates an attachment file, but does not permanently save a file to
C:\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files.
Use the following steps to e-mail a transfer file.
1. Click the Map Files tab.
2. Open the map file you want to e-mail as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click E-mail.
A transfer file is created and your computer's default operating system e-mail
program opens with the transfer file included as an attachment.
4. Complete the e-mail in accordance with your e-mail system.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
75

Printing
Printing a Map
You can print a map based on your paper size or screen size. If you choose to print a map
based on your paper size, you can also print a multi-page map that you can assemble using
the Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map instructions.
To Print a Map
Use the following steps to print a map.
1. Locate the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab.
3. Click the Map subtab.
4. Under Print Layout, select Page (the map print area is based on the paper size you
have specified in the Setup options) or Screen (the map print area is based on the
screen size).
The print area for a Page map displays as a red box on the map, which may not
always be visible. The overview map and the print area for a Screen map display as
a blue box on the overview map.
5. If you selected Screen in step 4, go to step 6. If you selected Page in step 4, select
your options and then go to step 6.
• Under Print Layout, select a layout option (Single, 2 x 2, or 3 x 3). The print
area displays on both the map and the overview map.
• If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 on the map layout graphic, and you do not want
to print all the pages in the multi page map, click each page you do not want
to print. The page appears dimmed or gray. (You can click a dimmed/gray
page again to print it.)
Note In the example below, page 4 will not print for the 2 x 2 map.
• Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to print.
• If not, pan the map to a new location and zoom to the correct level.
OR
• Street Atlas USA® Plus only: To change the photo zoom, select an
option from the Photo Zoom drop-down list or type the photo zoom in
the text box.
Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges or reduces the map features
and changes the map print area. If you increase the photo zoom level,
map text, lines, symbols, etc. display larger and your map print area is
reduced. If you decrease the photo zoom level, map text, lines,
symbols, etc. display smaller and your map print area is enlarged. The
reduction/enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display
under the Photo Zoom drop-down list.
• If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print
area or other settings, select the Lock Print Center check box. Selecting this
check box locks the print area and changes the tab label to red.
• Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire
print area. Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level.
77

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Tips
• Street Atlas USA Plus only: Add text or graphics to your map
• Street Atlas USA only: To add a title to a single-page map, select the Map
Title check box and click Map Title to assign the title's text, font, and
alignment.
6. To change printers or make choices for transparent/yellow background, paper
orientation, paper size, and paper source, click Setup. The Print Setup dialog opens.
Note From the Setup dialog box, click Properties to view additional options. If the
options are available, set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType
fonts to print as graphics. Consult your printer manual for additional information.
7. Click the Print button to print your map.
• To save a map to a file, see Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image.
• To adjust the print area of a Page map, select the Lock Print Center check box,
select the Select tool
, and then drag the frame to the new position.
Printing a Route and Directions
You can print maps of your route and route directions for any route you create.
Additionally, you can save your directions or along the way results in a text file. For more
information, see Saving Route Directions as Text.
For specific recommendations on best printing results, see your printer manual.
To Print a Route
Use the following steps to print an existing route.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab.
Note If you do not have a route on this map file, the route options are unavailable.
2. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer, change
printer properties, select a transparent/yellow background, select paper size, and
select paper orientation. Click OK when finished.
If the options are available under Printer Properties, set the graphics mode to use
raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics.
3. Select the route you want to print from the Name drop-down list. Only routes
contained in the current map file display in this list.
Street Atlas USA only - this does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus: If you
are using simplified file management, your only route print option displays in the
Name text box.
4. Under Options, select from one of the following choices:
• Overview–Provides an optimized map of your route and the route
summary—trip distance, trip time, start, total stops, and finish.
• Travel Package–Provides maps of the route with corresponding directions.
• Turn Details–Prints 2" x 2" maps of each of the turns in your route
directions.
• Directions–Provides action-based directions (turn, merge, bear, depart,
arrive, and continue) including the time frame for each action.
Note You can save route directions as a text file.
• Along the Way–Prints the search results of a previous Advanced Find search
within a current route. The search results are listed as they are listed in the
78

Printing
Find results. The Along the Way option is only available if you have recently
performed a find/category within current route search in the Advanced Find
subtab. For more information, see Performing an Advanced Search.
• Strip Maps–Provides detailed maps in the direction of travel of the route
along with directions that appear in the map margin. Strip maps are not
printed North Up like other printed maps. They are printed so that the
direction of travel is always at the top of the printed map.
5. If you selected Travel Package or Strip Maps in step 4, select the miles per page that
you want your route to cover from the Miles Per Page drop-down list.
Note When setting the number of miles per page, keep in mind that the number of
miles is not the distance of the route. Instead, it equals the width of the strip map
and determines the scale of the map.
6. Select Increasing from the Trip Time/Distance drop-down list to end the route
directions with the total time and distance.
OR
Select Decreasing from the Trip Time/Distance drop-down list to start the
directions with the total time and distance — similar to a countdown.
7. Optional. To view a preview of your selection, click View.
8. Click Print.
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
You can add text (framed or unframed) and graphics (north arrows, scale bars, and images)
to your map.
• To modify the properties of a text/graphic item, click the Select tool and click the
item on the map.
• To make graphic items added to your map the same size, press and hold the SHIFT key
on your keyboard or drag to select two items, right-click, select Make Same Size, and
select Width, Height, or Both from the menu.
• After you add text/graphic items to your map, you can align, snap, or layer them on the
map.
To Add Text to Your Map
Use the following steps to add text to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Framed Text tool .
OR
Click the Unframed Text tool .
79

Street Atlas USA User Guide
5. Click the location on the map where you want to add your text. A text box displays.
When not in editing mode, you can reposition your text by dragging the text box to
the new position.
6. Type the text in the text box. To type more than one line of text, press
SHIFT+ENTER on your keyboard to advance to another line. Press the ENTER key on
your keyboard when finished typing your text.
7. Under Layout Tools, select the font, style, and size for your text from the dropdown
lists.
8. To underline your text, click the Underline tool .
9. To change the color of your text, click the Font Color tool . From the Color dialog
box, you can:
• Click to select an alternative color. Click OK when finished.
• Click Define Custom Colors and create a custom color by assigning
red/green/blue or hue/sat/lum values. Click Add to Custom Colors and then
click OK.
10. Click the Align Left button to align the text in your text box to the left.
OR
Click the Center button to align the text in the center of the text box.
OR
Click the Align Right button to align the text in your text box to the right.
11. Click the Text Box Size button if you want the size of your text box to grow with
the amount of text typed.
The Text Box Size button is a toggle button. If the button is not activated, any text
placed on the map is placed in a default-sized text box. You can resize the default
size text box by selecting the text box on the map and dragging any of the white
boxes on the corners/sides of text box.
To Add a North Arrow to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a North arrow to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the North Arrow tool . All of the North Arrow styles display to the right.
5. Select the North Arrow style and then click the location on the map where you want
to add the graphic.
Once you place the North Arrow on the map, you can resize it by dragging any of the
white boxes on the corners/sides of the graphic. Reposition the North Arrow at any
time by dragging the graphic to the new position.
To Add a Scale Bar to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a scale bar to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
80

Printing
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Scale Bar tool . All of the Scale Bar styles display to the right.
5. Select the check box to the left of the Scale Bar style options and then select the
Scale Bar style.
AND/OR
Select the Scale check box to display the current scale on the map.
AND/OR
Select the Scale Reference Length check box to display the scale reference length
on the map.
AND/OR
Select the Zoom check box to display the current data zoom level on the map.
6. Click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic.
Once you place the Scale Bar on the map, you can resize it by dragging any of the
white boxes on the corners/sides of the graphic.
To Add an Image to Your Map
Use the following steps to add an image to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a
Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Image tool .
5. Click the location on the map where you want to add your image. The Select Image
File dialog box opens.
You can reposition the image at any time by dragging it to the new position.
6. Select an image file (.jpg, .bmp, or .gif) to place on your map and then click Open.
The image displays on the map and the file name displays in the text box next to the
Image tool under Layout Tools.
You can update the image at any time by clicking the Browse button and
browsing to an alternative image.
7. Select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the image's width-toheight
ratio while resizing.
8. Select the Preview Image check box to preview the image on the map.
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
After you add a text or graphic tool to your map, you can use the right-click options to align
each object with a certain location on the map.
Aligning Multiple Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
Use the following steps to align multiple text and graphic items on the map.
81

Street Atlas USA User Guide
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Place more than one text or graphic item on your map. For more information, see
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map.
3. While pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard, click each text/graphic item on the
map.
OR
Drag your mouse over the text/graphic items on the map to select multiple items at
once.
4. Right-click one of the items, point to Align, and then click:
• Left to align the left sides of all of the items; placement is based on the left
side of the left-most item.
• Right to align the right sides of all of the items; placement is based on the
right side of the right-most item.
• Top to align the top side of all of the items; placement is based on the top
side of the top-most item.
• Bottom to align the bottom side of all of the items; placement is based on
the bottom side of the bottom-most item.
• Vertical Center to center the items based on the average of the vertical
placement of the items.
• Horizontal Center to center the items based on the average of the
horizontal placement of the items.
• Center to center the items based on the center of the average area that the
items cover on the map.
• Stack Vertically to stack the items vertically on top of each other.
• Stack Horizontally to position the items side-by-side.
Tips
• To make multiple graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your keyboard
and select each item. Then, right-click, point to Make Same Size, and click Width,
Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the same size, the largest
item is always the basis for the size change. Important: For an item to be made the
same size as another item, the item must not be locked — for example, the Maintain
Aspect Ratio check box should be cleared for any images, only text items with default
size text boxes can be resized, and so on.
• To delete multiple text or graphic items, click the Edit tool, drag the mouse on the map
to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press the DELETE key on your
keyboard.
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
After you add a text or graphic tool to your map, you can snap each item to the location you
want it by dragging the item along the edges of the map or by dragging the item to snap it
to the horizontal center of the page.
To disable the auto-snap function, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while dragging
the text/graphic items on the map.
82

Printing
To Snap Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
Use the following steps to snap text and graphic items on a printed map.
1. Add text or graphics to your map.
2. Drag each text/graphic item you placed on the map to the location you want them on
the map. If you drag an item to the edge of the map print area, the text/graphic
snaps to the edge. If you drag the item to the horizontal center of the edge of the
map print area, the text/graphic snaps to the center of the edge. You can also drag
the item to the center of the map print area to snap it to the center of the printed
map.
Tips
• To make multiple text and graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your
keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, select Make Same Size, and click
Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the same size, the
largest item is always the basis for the size change.
• To delete multiple text/graphic items, select the Edit tool, drag the mouse in a downright
direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press
the DELETE key on your keyboard.
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
You may want to layer text or graphic items on your printed map. In this case, use the
right-click Bring to Front/Send to Back options so that each can still be displayed.
To Layer Multiple Text or Graphic Items on a Printed Map
Use the following steps to layer multiple text or graphic items on the map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Place more than one text or graphic item on your map (see Adding Text or Graphics
to Your Map), placing the text/graphic items on top of each other.
3. If one of the text/graphic items you want to display is partially underneath another
text/graphic item, select the item you want to display, right-click, and click Bring to
Front.
To reverse this step, right-click the item and select Send to Back.
Tips
• To make multiple text and graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your
keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, point to Make Same Size, and click
Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the same size, the
largest item is always the basis for the size change.
• To delete multiple text/graphic items, select the Edit tool, drag the mouse in a downright
direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press
the DELETE key on your keyboard.
Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map
83

Street Atlas USA User Guide
When you print a map, a yellow (or black if you are using High Contrast Colors) background
automatically displays on the printout. If you want a transparent background — for
example, if you are printing transparencies — you can change the Print settings to print with
a transparent background.
To Print Maps With a Transparent Background
Use the following steps to turn off the yellow background when printing a map.
1. Center the map on the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
3. Select the Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a Map.
4. Click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, select the Print Maps with a Transparent
Background check box.
6. Click OK.
All map printouts print with a transparent background.
To Print Maps With a Yellow/Black Background
Use the following steps to turn on the yellow/black background when printing a map.
1. Center the map on the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
3. Select the Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a Map.
4. Click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, clear the Print Maps with a Transparent
Background check box.
6. Click OK.
All map printouts print with a yellow background (or black if you are using High
Contrast Colors).
Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map
After you have printed the sheets for your multi-page map, you are ready to assemble the
map.
Before you begin, be sure you have a clear work surface large enough to accommodate the
final map size.
You will need the following tools to assemble your map:
• Pencil
• Razor knife
• Straight-edge ruler (longer than the edge of the longest sheet)
• Permanent tape (invisible or "magic" type)
• Removable tape
To Manually Assemble a Multi-page Map
Use the following steps to manually assemble a multi-page map.
84

Printing
1. For each sheet that needs to be trimmed, mark the edges of the sheet to indicate the
areas to trim.
2. Use the straight edge ruler and razor knife to trim each sheet to the thin black line
bordering the map.
Note For adjacent sheets, trim only one page. This makes piecing the sheets
together easier.
The following diagrams of a 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 multi-page map provide additional
information on where to trim the sheets. The arrows indicate the edges to be
trimmed.
2 x 2 multi-page Map
3 x 3 multi-page Map
3. Align two adjacent sheets, placing the trimmed edge on top of the non-trimmed
edge.
Notes
• Piece together the multi-page map one seam at a time. This is especially
important for a 3 x 3 multi-page map.
• Build the multi-page map from the inside out to minimize any misalignment.
85

Street Atlas USA User Guide
4. Using two small pieces of removable tape, tack together the aligned sheets.
Note This is a temporary measure. Steps 6 through 10 describe how to completely
secure the sheets.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the sheets are pieced together.
6. With the multi-page temporarily pieced together, use small pieces of removable tape
to secure the corners and edges of the multi-page map.
Note Place the removable tape on the corners and edges, not along the seams.
7. For each seam, fix the tape to the work surface, not on the sheet, so the tape is in
alignment with the seam.
8. Spool off enough permanent tape to cover the entire seam. Be careful not to let the
tape touch the map until you are ready to apply it (in step 9).
9. Keeping the length of the tape taut, carefully apply the tape to the seam until both
sides are fixed to the work surface.
86

Printing
10. Press the tape along the seam to remove any air gaps.
11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all seams are completely pieced together.
12. Using the straight-edge ruler, carefully trim the edges of the map at the seams
(where the tape is affixed to the workspace).
13. Peel off the removable tape at the corners and the edges. You are now ready to
display your multi-page map.
87

Finding a Location on the Map
Find Overview
There are four Find options you can use to search for and locate places and other map
items.
• QuickSearch–Search for places, addresses, cities/towns, ZIP/Postal Codes, and
coordinate positions. If the item you are looking for is not recognized, the Advanced
tab displays automatically.
• POIs–Search for specific points of interest, such as hotels, restaurants, hospitals,
department stores, etc. Search a specified distance from the current map center or
along an active route.
• GPS Radar–Search for points of interest and waypoints within a designated distance
from your current location while tracking a route with a GPS receiver. Before you use
GPS Radar, check the Find settings in the Options dialog box.
• Advanced–Control what you are looking for with the Find field, and where you are
looking for it with the Within field while you conduct a more detailed search.
Find Options
Use the Find tab in the Options dialog box to set your preferences when you use GPS Radar
to find POIs when tracking with GPS.
To Set GPS Radar Find Options
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the Find tab.
OR
Click the Find tab and click the Options button .
2. Select your preferences:
• Calculate the distance to objects by–The method to search for objects.
• Select Road to calculate the distance by road.
• Select Distance to calculate the distance as the crow flies.
• Search area equals miles–The search distance (for a
road search) or radius (for a direct search). Select the distance from the
drop-down list.
The results returned are based on the calculation method. For example, if you
are looking for gas stations and you have set your calculation method as Road
and the search area for 10 miles, the results will not show you gas stations
that are 10 miles or less in distance as the crow flies if the distance to get to
them by road is more than 10 miles.
• Search only in direction of travel–Select the check box if you want to
search only in the direction you are traveling (when you are moving).
• Repeat the search every
• minute(s)–The interval at which to repeat the search. Select the check box
and then select the number of minutes from the drop-down list. Note This
option must be selected to use GPS Radar with NavMode.
89

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Only repeat search when GPS is tracking–Select the check box if
you want to suspend searching when the GPS is disabled.
• Only highlight the selected object–Select the check box to highlight only
the selected result on the map, rather than all results.
• Enable voice reporting–Select the check box to allow voice reporting of
results.
• Report: –From the drop-down box, select the
option for reporting.
• Interrupt report for new search results–Select this check box if
you want a new result to interrupt voice reporting.
To restore the default settings, click Use Defaults.
Performing a Basic Search
Use the QuickSearch tab to locate places, addresses, ZIP/Postal Codes, coordinate positions,
and more. To search for other items, such as an area codes, street intersections, or a
category (such as Park, Interstate, and so on), use the Advanced subtab.
To Perform a Basic Search
Follow the steps below to use the QuickSearch subtab.
1. Click the Find tab and then click the QuickSearch button.
OR
Press CTRL+F on your keyboard.
2. Type a name, address, ZIP/Postal Code, town name, coordinate, draw object label,
address book contact name, street intersection, etc. in the Search For text box. See
Searching Tips for a description of input formats.
OR
Select From Address Book from the Search For drop-down list to find an address
book entry in your DeLorme Address Book and then click OK.
Notes
• The Book check box (under the Address Book buttons) must be selected to
search for address book contacts. For more information, see Searching for
Address Book Contacts.
• Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or six characters for
a Postal Code search (you do not need to include spaces in a Postal Code).
• Address searches should be in the following formats: street address, city,
state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code OR street address, city, state,
Zip/Postal Code.
3. Click Search. If your search is:
• Very Successful
The results list displays and, if there is one excellent match, the map centers
on that place. A MapTag displays if the MapTags check box is selected. The
only time a MapTag is not placed is when you find and then go to a labeled
area that has no single map point associated with it (for example, a large
park).
• Successful
90

Finding a Location on the Map
The results list displays. Scroll or browse through the list of search results
until you find the one you want to locate. To center an item on the map,
double-click it or select it and then click Go To. A MapTag displays if the
MapTags check box is selected.
Tip Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without
adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more information on
viewing results, see Tips on Viewing Search Results.
• Not Successful
The Advanced dialog area displays. The program makes its best guess about
the type of search you were trying and your search word(s) display in the
upper-right text box. Click Search to proceed. For more information, see
Performing an Advanced Search.
Tips
• Use a comma to separate city and state/country (Atlanta, Georgia; Montreal,
Canada), major point of interest and state (Mt Washington, NH), parts of an address
(444 E Pk Drive, Milford, CT or 444 E Pk Dr, 06460), or coordinate points (N 43.8, W
70.2).
• You can find major landmarks or points of interest, such as Yellowstone National
Park and Mount Rushmore, without using the state as part of the search criteria.
• Separate street intersections with an ampersand (Congress St & High St, Portland,
ME or Congress St & High St, 04101).
• Avoid entering a period in your text.
• Click the Search For down arrow to view a drop-down list of previously used search
words and examples.
• The Search For drop-down list keeps a history of your successful search words
during a session and between sessions. To delete your search history, select Clear
History from the drop-down list. Click No to delete the search history in the
QuickSearch drop-down list. Click Yes to delete the search history in both the
QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs.
• Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard; center
a search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a result as a
MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book Entry; or assign it
a start, stop, or finish in a route. Just right-click a search result and click the option.
Performing an Advanced Search
The Advanced search option allows you to perform more detailed searches by controlling
what you are looking for using the Find field and where you are looking for it using the
Within field.
• The fields available for selection under Within vary based on your Find selection.
• Type text in the fields and use the drop-down list to see examples and your recent
searches.
• The fill-in fields located in the center of the tab vary based on both your Find and
Within selections.
You can also search for more types of items than you can in the QuickSearch tab, such as
by category, street intersection, and more.
To Perform an Advanced Search
91

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Follow the steps below to use the advanced search function.
1. Click the Find tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
Note This screen automatically displays if you performed an unsuccessful
QuickSearch.
2. From the Find drop-down list, select the Find type.
When more than one match is available, the closest match displays first in the
Results list.
Click a Find type in the list below for more information.
• Name
Use Name to locate a city, town, landmark, object label, and so on.
• Street Address
Use Street Address to locate by street number and name, highway number,
and so on.
You can use standard abbreviations like Rd (Road), St (Street or Saint), Mt
(Mount), Dr (Drive), and Ct (Court).
• Street Intersection
Use this search to locate the intersection of two specified roads.
• ZIP/Postal Codes
Use at least a partial ZIP/Postal Code to locate the covered regions. The
results are displayed in a browse list. This means you are taken into the
ZIP/Postal Code database at the closest matching, valid ZIP/Postal Code. You
can browse through results in either direction.
Use at least a partial ZIP Code to locate the covered regions. The results are
displayed in a browse list.
• Name and/or Category
Searches for a specific name in a specific category. For example, if you want
to find a particular restaurant in your town, you would type restaurant in the
Keywords text box, type the name of the restaurant in the Name text box,
and then type your location information in the available text boxes.
For more information on category searches, see Keywords for Category
Searches.
Note Category keywords must be at least three characters in length.
• Category
Searches for a category of items within the specified area. For more
information on category searches, see Keywords for Category Searches.
Notes
• In all category searches, the Keywords field is optional. If the
Keywords field is left blank, all objects in the selected Within area
display in the Results list.
• Category keywords must be at least three characters in length.
• Area Code and Exchange
There are no Within options for Area Code and Exchange search. Use at least
a partial Area Code and Exchange to locate the covered regions. This is not an
individual phone search. The results display in a browse list.
• Latitude/Longitude
A single result is returned using a latitude/longitude coordinate search. There
are no Within options. Coordinates must be in one of the many formats
92

Finding a Location on the Map
recognized by the program and are based on your Display settings in the
Options dialog box.
3. From the Within drop-down list, select an option. Available choices are based on
what you selected as your Find type.
Click a Within type in the following list for more information.
• North America
Searches for a name in North America.
• US/Canada
Searches for ZIP/Postal Code within the United States and Canada. Available
only when ZIP/Postal Code(s) is selected as the Find parameter.
• City or County
Searches for the specified name within the ZIP/Postal Codes associated with
the city/county and state/province specified in the text boxes.
• ZIP/Postal Code
Searches for the specified name within a ZIP/Postal Code. Displays a
ZIP/Postal Code text field. A U.S. search for a ZIP+4 Code is treated the
same as a 5-digit ZIP Code. A Canadian search for a 3-character Postal Code
is treated the same as a 6-character Postal Code.
Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Code. Displays a ZIP Code text
field. A search for a ZIP+4 Code is treated the same as a five-digit ZIP Code.
• U.S. State
Searches for a name within a specific U.S. state. This option is available only
when Category or Name and/or Category is selected as the Find parameter.
Note If you are searching within a larger state, this type of search may take
longer than others because a lot of data is being searched to obtain a result.
• Current Map City
Searches for the specified name within the boundaries of all ZIP/Postal Codes
associated with the city at the current map center.
• Current Map Rectangle
Searches for the specified location within the currently visible map area.
• Distance from Map Center
Performs a search in all directions from the center of the map using the
specified distance. Also called a radius search. The minimum distance you can
use is 50 feet; the maximum distance is 100 miles.
• Current Route
Searches for objects within the specified distance from your currently active,
calculated route. The minimum distance you can use is 500 feet; the
maximum distance is 10 miles. Results are listed in the sequence they occur
along the route, from start point to finish point.
Note This search may take longer than other types of searches.
4. Type information in the text boxes to the right of the Find and Within fields. The
text boxes available are based on the selected Find and Within fields.
Tip A few text boxes are optional and you may get more results by leaving them
blank. To see if a text box is optional, hold your cursor over the text box label or
down arrow and read the ToolTip for that text box.
93

Street Atlas USA User Guide
5. Click Search or press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
The Results list displays your search results with closest matching items at the top of
the list.
6. Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to
locate. To center an item on the map, select it and then click Go To or double-click
it.
A yellow MapTag displays at the location if the MapTags check box is selected.
Tips
• Single click an item in the results list if you want to highlight it on the map without
adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more information on viewing
results, see Tips on Viewing Search Results.
• Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard; center
a search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a result as a
MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book entry; or assign it
a start, stop, or finish in a route. Just right-click a search result and click the option.
• The program keeps a history of your search words during a session. If you want to
delete your Advanced search history, click the QuickSearch subtab and select Clear
History from the Search For drop-down list. Then, click Yes to delete the search
history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs.
Performing a POI Search
The POIs subtab gives you an easy way to find the places of interest you are looking for.
You can search over four million places of interest including Wal-Mart stores, post offices,
hospitals, and much more.
• Some POIs contain extended information, such as website links, hours of operation, and
so on. To view this extended information, right-click the POI search result, point to
Add, and then click Detailed MapNote to view the information on the map. Or, rightclick
the POI search result and click Info to view the extended information in the Info
tab.
• POI searches will find more objects than may be currently visible on the map. To see all
POIs on the map, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the menu
arrow and click Options), click the Map Features tab, select the Points of Interest
(Minor) and the Business Points of Interest (Minor) check boxes, and click OK.
To Find a Point of Interest
Use the following steps to find a point of interest with the POIs subtab.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the POIs subtab.
3. Type the name of the point of interest you are searching for (for example, Wal-Mart
or Sheraton) in the Name text box.
4. Type the category that best fits your POI name (for example, type Hotel if you are
searching for a Sheraton, type Department Store if you are searching for Wal-
Mart) in the Keywords text box. See Keywords for Category Searches for more
information.
OR
Select an appropriate keyword from the Keywords drop-down list examples and
history.
94

Finding a Location on the Map
5. Type the distance you want to search in the Distance text box. Type the number of
miles followed by "mi" — for example, 5 mi.
6. Select From Map Center or Along Current Route.
7. Click Search. If your search is:
• Very Successful–The results list displays and, if there is one excellent
match, the map centers on that place and a yellow box displays at the
location of the POI match.
• Successful–The results list displays. Scroll or browse through the list of
search results until you find the one you want to locate. To center an item on
the map, double-click it or select it and then click Go To.
Tips
• Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a
MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more information on viewing results, see
Tips on Viewing Search Results.
• Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard; center a
search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a result as a MapTag,
MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book entry; or assign it a start, stop,
or finish in a route. Just right-click a search result and click the option you want.
Finding Points Near Your Current Location
Use the GPS Radar option on the Find tab to search for points of interest (POIs) such as gas
stations, restaurants, accommodations, rest areas, and so on near your current location (if
tracking with a GPS) or near the current map center when viewing another location.
You can also search for waypoints. If you enable voice reporting on the Find tab in the
Options dialog box, you can hear the nearest search result. Once you find the waypoint or
POI you want, you can use the GPS Radar subtab to center the map on the route on that
point or POI and get directions to it.
What you need to know
• Before you start, set your Find preferences in the Options dialog.
• A GPS Radar search finds items that are the shortest driving distance from your current
location—within just a few miles. Unless you select the Only in Direction of Travel
check box, some of the search results may be behind you. GPS radar calculates a route
to each point and the fastest destination for you to drive to is listed first. If you are on a
one-way road or freeway, GPS Radar takes into account the fact that you need to drive
further to get off at an exit. You can click each item in the result list to see each option,
to highlight the route to each destination, and to see a description of each one as well
as driving directions. This should help you choose the best one for your needs.
• The time required for a GPS Radar search varies by the distance, density of objects in
the area, the categories chosen, and whether you are searching only in the direction of
travel.
• In GPS tab view, click the Interrupt button to interrupt a long search and see a
listing of the nearby points. Driving directions will not be provided.
• In GPS NavMode, GPS Radar results display in an orange status bar at the bottom of
the map area and long searches are automatically interrupted; click the More Info
button on the orange status bar to open the GPS Radar subtab and adjust your
settings for a shorter search.
95

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Important To enable GPS Radar in NavMode, you must select the Repeat Search
Every check box and enter the number of minutes for repeating the search on the
Find tab in the Options dialog box. If you are using the E-Z Nav route wizard, you
must create your route and then set up your GPS Radar search.
To Find Points Near Your Location
Use the following steps to find points near your location.
1. Set your GPS Radar preferences on the Find tab in the Options dialog box.
2. In the program's tab area, click the Find tab.
3. Click the GPS Radar subtab button.
4. From the Find drop-down list, select the category to search (for example, Gas
Stations, Restaurants, etc.).
OR
From the Find drop-down list, select Custom and then click the Custom button. In
the Radar dialog, type a keyword or phrase to search for a specific point or to search
for multiple POI types, such as "Chinese restaurant or Mexican restaurant."
To use the Custom search to search for waypoints, use search general or specific
terms such as "draw symbol," "map pin," or "waypoint."
5. To turn the search repeat on or off (set with the Repeat Search Every check box
on the Find tab in the Options dialog box), click the Repeat button . This is
required if you are using GPS NavMode.
Note Searches are not repeated when the GPS position is stationary.
6. Click Search.
The search results display in the list box.
7. Click a search result to select it.
A green, highlighted line displays on the map between your current/specified location
and the point of interest's location.
Note Click Recenter to center the map on the selected point in the route. Click
Insert Stop to insert the selected search result into your current route.
8. Select the Info option to view the information about the point, including the distance
from the current location.
OR
Select the Directions option to view directions to the point from your
current/specified location.
Finding a Symbol by its Name
Within the Draw tab, you can attach a name to any symbol you add to your map. For more
information on adding symbols to the map, see Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, or
Text Label to the Map.
You can use a name to help locate a symbol you have already placed on a map using the
QuickSearch feature on the Find tab. For example, if you named a symbol "My House" when
you placed it on the map, use the following steps for conducting a search on the unique
symbol name.
To Find a Symbol by its Name
Use the following steps to find a symbol by its name.
1. Click the Find tab.
96

Finding a Location on the Map
2. Using QuickSearch, type the symbol name followed by the town and state
abbreviation (for example, My Office, Yarmouth, ME) in the Search For text box.
3. Click Search. The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search
For text box. The symbol name displays in the Name column.
4. Double-click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on
the map. The map view centers on the item. A MapTag displays the symbol name at
the symbol location.
Note To display MapTags, select the MapTags check box on the Find tab.
Tips on Viewing Search Results
These tips can help you view Find tab search results.
• To make it easier to view a long list of search results, increase the height of the tab
by dragging the top of the tab area up or by clicking the increase (up) tab height
arrow
at the top of the tab.
• To sort results by another column, click the column header. An arrow identifies the
sort column. Click a second time to reverse the sort order.
Note This feature is not available when in browse mode; see last item in this list.
• To copy the information for the selected item or items, press CTRL+C on your
keyboard. You can then paste the text into another program, such as a word
processing program.
• Right-click an item in the results list to display the following options:
• Copy to Clipboard–Copies the detailed information for the selected item or
items and is available for pasting into another program.
• Go To–Centers the map on the selected item.
• Select All–Selects all items in the list and highlights up to 350 on the map. If
you right-click again with all items selected, you can select Copy to
Clipboard; point to Add and then click MapTag, MapNote, Detailed
MapNote, Address Book Entry, or Waypoint; or point to Route and click
Insert Stop. You must have the MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected
to add a MapTag.
• Add–Adds a MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Address Book Entry, or
Waypoint for the selected item or items. You must have the MapTags
checkbox on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag.
• Route–Places a start, stop, or finish point at that location on the map based
on your selection. The location is listed in the Start text box, Stop text box, or
Finish text box in the Route tab.
• To locate an item on the map without moving the map, single click an item in the
results list. It is highlighted on the map as long as it is in the current map view. This
is especially helpful when you are at the data zoom level you want but point labels
are not displaying.
Notes To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking up to
350 items in the results list. If the items are listed continuously, click the first item in
the list and then press and hold the SHIFT key while clicking the last item you want.
• You can adjust column widths. The new size is retained until changed again. You
cannot rearrange the column order. Different search types result in different column
orders.
• There are two types of results lists:
97

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Most searches provide a fixed number of results. If all of
the results do not fit in the screen area, a scroll bar
automatically displays.
• Some searches provide results you can browse. This means
the entire database displays with the best match
highlighted. It is possible to continue browsing to the first
or last item in the database.
Scroll
Bar
Browse
Buttons
Keywords for Category Searches
Your DeLorme application recognizes hundreds of English words to generate both general
and specific searches using category keywords. Try entering words that seem appropriate.
Keyword Samples
The list below shows a few of the categories that expand to reveal sample keywords.
Sample keywords may be listed in more than one category.
Boundaries, Map, and Surveying
Border
Boundary
Contour
Crosshair
Grid
Line
Point
ZIP/Postal Code
Buildings and Structures
Airport
Bridge
Business
Landmark
Library
Businesses
Hotel
Gasoline
Restaurant
Pizza
Education and Cultural
College
Local Park
Park
School
State Park
University
Miscellaneous
98

Finding a Location on the Map
Cemetery
Hiking
Mine
Note
Park
Object Types
All of the stock draw symbols (such as blue map pin, red flag, canoe, etc.)
Draw symbols
XData objects (Street Atlas Plus only)
Phone objects
Objects in non-DeLorme data
Roads and Trails
Bridge
Exit
Ferry
Foot Trail
Highway
Hiking
Interstate
One Way
Railroad
Road
Street
Trail
Tunnel
Travel Amenities
Airport
Exit
Landmark
Rest Area
Notes on Category Searches
The following list provides notes you may find helpful for performing category searches.
• Category keyword searches must be at least three characters in length.
• Keywords are not case-sensitive. Using all capital letters or no capital letters does
not affect the search.
• Some generic keywords (water, for example) match many categories and display a
dialog box with specific categories. Select or clear these categories, depending on
what you want to locate.
• In the Keyword Category samples below, some keywords are used together to
narrow the search. The following two examples provide information on how results
may differ using words together and separately:
• Example 1–Using Local Road provides many category results, such as Ferry
Crossing Local Road, Local or Rural Road, and Railroad Local Line.
99

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Example 2–Using Road provides over 100 results from more categories.
• Partial words are recognized when performing a search.
• You can use keywords in any order. You get the same results using Local Road as for
Road Local.
• A keyword may find categories related to the word rather than including the word.
• Use the word "or" in the Keywords text box to search for multiple categories. For
example, "pizza" or "fast food."
MapTags: Converting, Moving, Hiding, and Deleting
When you search for and go to a Find search result, a yellow
MapTag displays at that location if the MapTags check box on the
Find tab is selected. If MapTags are cluttering your view of the
map, you can move the text area of the MapTag, hide them from
view, or delete one, several, or all MapTags.
To Convert MapTags to MapNotes
To change all of the MapTags on the map to MapNotes, which can be retained when you
save the map file, right-click the map, click Manage Draw, and then click Convert All
MapTags to MapNotes. A new draw layer called MapNotes is created in your map file.
To Move a MapTag
You cannot detach a MapTag from its anchor point; you can move only the text area.
Use the following steps to move the MapTag text area.
1. Use the Find tab, search for a place, street address, coordinate, category item, or
street intersection. MapTags are placed on the map at each point you locate.
2. Click the Select tool .
3. Click the text area for the MapTag you want to move and drag it to the position on
the map where you want it. The anchor point does not move.
4. Click the Select tool again to resume normal map operations.
To Hide MapTags
The MapTags check box controls if existing MapTags display on the map.
• MapTags are visible when the MapTags check box is selected.
• MapTags are hidden from view when the MapTags check box is cleared. Select the
MapTags check box at any time to display existing MapTags.
To Delete MapTags
You can delete one, several, or all MapTags.
To delete MapTags from the Find tab:
• To delete one MapTag, click the Select tool , click the MapTag, click the Delete
Tag tool , and click the Select tool again.
OR
Right-click the MapTag you want to delete and select Delete MapTag.
100

Finding a Location on the Map
• To delete several MapTags, click the Select tool , hold down the SHIFT key on
your keyboard while clicking the MapTags, click the Delete Tag
the Select tool again.
tool, and click
• To delete all MapTags, click the Delete Tag tool . A message box displays "Delete
all MapTags?" Click OK to confirm deletion. Click Cancel to retain all MapTags.
To delete MapTags from other tabs:
• Right-click the MapTag and click Delete MapTag.
101

Using Address Book Contacts
Searching for Address Book Contacts
You have several ways to search for address book contacts:
• Use the QuickSearch function on the Find tab to search for the name of a contact;
browse for the contact or type the name of the contact
• Use the Route tab to search for an address book entry as a route start, stop, or
finish; browse for the contact or type the name of the contact
• Use the toolbar to search for an address book entry as a route start or finish; browse
for the contact or type the name of the contact
With these functions, you can select the option from the applicable
drop-down list or you can type the name of the contact directly in the text box to find the
entry. If you type the name of the contact, you must select the Book check box in the Find
tab (underneath the Address Book buttons). To disable the address book search
functionality, clear the Book check box.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Importing Existing Address Book Information
You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering
each record. Imported address book items are merged with your existing address book.
Items with identical names are not replaced during the import process.
To Import an Existing Address Book
Use the following steps to import an existing address book and view its contents on the
map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Import.
4. Click Browse to find the .dab, .txt, .csv, or .tab address book file. Click the file and
then click Open.
5. If the first line of the title contains column names, select the First Row is Header
check box.
6. If you want to adjust the column headers for your address book information, select a
default column label from the available drop-down lists.
There is a list for Name, Street Address, City, State Abbreviation, ZIP/Postal Code,
Telephone, Latitude, Longitude. The information in your address book displays to the
right of these lists.
7. Click OK.
The address book contacts are imported into the program. All street address or
103

Street Atlas USA User Guide
latitude/longitude matches display on the map with the following symbol and the
name of the contact.
Note If your contacts do not display on the map, check the Located? column in the
Address Book dialog box to verify a successful match was made. If Not Located
displays next to any of your records, either address/coordinate information was not
provided with the contact or the address/coordinate information could not be found
in the program.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Manually Entering Address Book Information
You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering
each record.
You can also add an address book entry by right-clicking the map, selecting Create
Address Book Entry, and following steps 4–6 below. If you right-click the map at the
location for the address book entry, some of the information, such as coordinates, street
name, city, state, etc., automatically complete the Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry
dialog box.
To Manually Enter Address Book Information
Use the following steps to manually enter address book information.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click New.
The Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box opens.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. From the Update Location drop-down list, select the method for updating the
location on the map; From Street Address, From Lat/Lon, or No (if you do not
want to update the location.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for each contact you want to add.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact
You can center the map on any address book contact you have with the Go To function in
the Address Book dialog box.
To Center the Map on an Address Book Contact
104

Using Address Book Contacts
Use the following steps to center the map on an address book contact.
Notes
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click the contact.
4. Click Go To.
The map centers on the selected contact.
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book
Once you have imported your address book contacts, you may need to edit the information
if your contacts have moved, changed phone numbers, etc. Instead of importing the
information again, you can simply edit the information.
To Edit a Contact In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to edit a contact in your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Double-click the record you want to edit.
OR
Click the record you want to edit and then click Edit.
4. Edit the applicable information.
5. If you want to move the contact, select the method to place it on the map from the
Update Location drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Manually Moving a Contact on the Map
Once you have created a contact in an address book, you can manually move it on the map
using the move address book entry function.
To Manually Move a Contact's Location on the Map
Use the following steps to manually move a contact's location on the map.
1. Click the Find tab.
105

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Notes
2. Click the Move Address Book Entry button .
Your cursor changes to
contact.
when you hover over the location of an address book
3. Click and drag the contact to a different location on the map.
The Located status for that record (in the Address Book dialog box) changes to
Manual.
4. Click the move address book entry icon again to resume normal map operations.
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Relocating Address Book Contacts
Once you import an address book from a previous version of your application, you can
relocate your address book entries (except for manual entries) so they match the most
recent data. You are prompted to do this the first time you open the address book after
installing a new version of your application; however, if you do not relocate the entries at
that time, you can do it later.
Important If you do not relocate your address book, the entries may not be accurately
placed according to the latest DeLorme road data.
To Relocate Contacts In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to relocate address book entries (except manual entries) on the
map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Relocate All.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK to relocate the entries.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book
Once you successfully create an address book, you can delete the contact information at
any time.
To Delete a Contact In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to delete a contact in your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
106

Using Address Book Contacts
Notes
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click the record you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
6. Click Done.
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Showing/Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map
Once you add contacts to your address book, you can show or hide the contact information
on the map.
To Show/Hide Address Book Contacts on the Map
Use the following steps to show/hide address book contacts on the map.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Select the Book check box to show address book contacts on the map and enable
address book searching with the Find tab, Route tab, and toolbar.
OR
Clear the Book check box to hide address book contacts on the map and disable
address book searching with the Find tab, Route tab, and toolbar.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Deleting Your Entire Address Book
Once you have created an address book, you can delete the records it contains one at a
time or all at once.
To Delete an Entire Address Book
Use the following steps to delete an entire address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Clear All.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK to delete the address book.
5. Click Done.
Notes
107

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
Exporting Your Address Book
You can export your address book to another program using the Export function in the
Address Book dialog box. Exported address books are in DeLorme Address Book binary
format (*.dab) or comma-separated file (*.csv) format. Latitude and longitude values are
not exported.
To Export Your Address Book
Use the following steps to export your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button .
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Export.
The Save As dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the location where you want to save the exported address book file.
5. Type the file name for your exported file in the File Name text box.
6. Select DeLorme Address Book (*.dab) or Comma-separated File (*.csv) from
the Save as Type drop-down list. DeLorme Address Book files retain all of their
information and can be imported into compatible DeLorme programs. Commaseparated
files do not contain coordinate information. You can view text files in thirdparty
applications such as Microsoft® Excel.
7. Click Save.
8. Click OK to acknowledge the export location.
9. Click Done.
Notes
• The address book has a 200-record limit.
• You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.
• You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.
108

Using Phone Data
Searching for Phone Book Listings
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
You can install the phone data to your hard drive or use it from the DVD.
To Install Phone Data to your Hard Drive
If you install the phone data to your hard drive, it is always accessible when you use the
Phone tab.
To install the data:
1. Insert the Phone Data DVD into your computer's DVD drive.
The Installation Wizard opens.
2. Follow the on-screen steps to install the phone data to your hard drive.
To Use Phone Data from the DVD
You can use the phone data from the DVD without installing it to your hard drive.
1. Insert the Phone Data DVD into your computer's DVD drive.
The Installation Wizard opens.
2. Click Cancel, click Yes when prompted, and then click Finish to exit the wizard.
3. Click the Phone tab.
4. Click Data.
The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.
5. Browse to your computer's DVD drive and click the Phone folder.
6. Click OK.
The states/provinces on the DVD are available in the State/Prov drop-down list in the
Phone tab.
Searching for a Phone Book Listing
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
With the Phone tab, you can search for a name and address based on a given phone
number or search for a phone number based upon a specified name and/or address. You
can pick and choose your selections to add to map, make a dataset, and so on.
Notes
• A hyphen (-) before the name in a search result indicates a business listing.
• An asterisk (*) before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call
preferenceThe person or business listed has registered a preference to not be
solicited by telephone (as provided by law). DeLorme products cannot be relied
upon as a method for legal compliance with state and federal regulations. A
109

Street Atlas USA User Guide
number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of the following is true:
The phone number is unlisted. Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to have
their phone number be available from directory assistance but not published in
any phone directories.
Note Customers paying for non-published service desire complete privacy of
their phone number, which means it is not published in the phone book and is
unavailable from directory assistance. Non-published numbers are not available in
Phone Data.
The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission's National Do Not Call
Registry.
You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your registration at
https://www.donotcall.gov.
The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations.
You can register your preference for mail and e-mail solicitations with the Direct
Marketing Association at http://www.the-dma.org/.
• Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the Phone text
boxes.
• Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do not
know the state for your query.
To Search for a Phone Book Listing
Use the following steps to search for a phone book listing.
1. If you have not installed the phone data to your hard disk drive, you can access it
from the DVD.
2. Click the Phone tab to display the Phone dialog area.
3. Select the Residential check box to view residential phone book listings.
AND/OR
Select the Business check box to view business phone book listings.
AND/OR
Select the Hide Multiple YP Headings check box to display only one Yellow Pages
heading for each business phone number.
4. Select the country you want to search within from the Country drop-down list.
The States/Provinces drop-down list updates according to the selected country.
5. Type/select the name, street address, city, state, and/or ZIP/Postal Code to search
for the phone number(s) associated with that information.
OR
Type the phone number to search for the name, address, city, state/province, and
ZIP/Postal Code associated with that phone number.
OR
Type yellow page keywords in the Yellow Pg text box to find all of the phone book
listings available based on your search criteria.
Notes
• Type a city in the City text box to narrow your yellow page search. Do not
enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or three digits for a Postal
Code search.
• Yellow page keywords must be at least three characters in length.
Text Box
Name
Tip
Name searches do not require punctuation.
110

Searching for Phone Book Listings
Type the last name first.
The Phone tab recognizes partial last names. You may get better
results (for longer names or if you are unsure of the spelling) if
you only type a portion of the name.
Many business names are abbreviated in phone book listings. For
best results, try additional searches using alternate spellings or
abbreviations.
Street Address
City
ZIP/Postal
Code
Phone
Yellow Pg
(Yellow Pages)
Street name descriptors (e.g., street, road, drive) should not be
used for address searches. However, you can use street name
abbreviations (e.g., st, rd, dr).
You can use street address ranges (such as 100-200 Main St) for
address searches.
Long city names may be abbreviated in the Phone data. Try
shortening the city name until the search finds the city name you
recognize, then use that abbreviation. You must also select a
State, or type a full or partial ZIP/Postal Code or phone number.
City listings may have variances in spelling, such as "Saint Louis"
rather than St Louis".
ZIP Code searches must contain at least three digits. Postal Code
searches must contain at least three characters.
Phone number searches must contain at least six digits (the area
code and exchange; no punctuation is necessary).
Yellow page searches should be singular (for example, type
restaurant instead of restaurants).
If you use multiple words, all of the words are required to form a
match.
There are over 34,000 yellow page headings possible. Use
keywords you would expect to find in the yellow pages.
Yellow page searches must be at least three characters in length.
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click Search.
The search results display in the Search Results area on the lower-left corner of the
dialog area.
Notes
• If you do not receive any results from your yellow page search, use an
alternative keyword for your search attempt. For example, if you are looking
for a clothing store, type “clothing” instead of “clothes.” Or, if the alternative
keyword still does not work, search (by name) for a clothing store and see
what category it is listed under (the category displays in parenthesis at the
end of the result).
• If more than 1000 search results match your search criteria, the More button
becomes activated. Click More to browse to the next 1000 search results.
7. Click one or more search results in the Search Results area and then click Add (or
right-click the search results and click Add) to add your search result to the
Selection area in the lower-right corner of the dialog area.
Note Press the CTRL key on your keyboard to select more than one search result at
a time. You can also double-click a search result to add it to the Selections area
OR click Add All (or right-click the search results and click Add All) to include all of
111

Street Atlas USA User Guide
your search results to the Selection area.
Note The Selection area has a 1,000 listing limit, as described in the license
agreement.
8. Use one of the following options to modify the selections in the Selections area:
• Click Map (or right-click your selections and click Map) to add your phone
book listings to the map. To add all of the phone book listings in the
Selections area to the map, right-click the selections, click Select All, and
then click Map. Once a phone selection is on the map, you can view details
about the listing by right-clicking its symbol and clicking Info.
Note Mapped businesses are indicated with a square symbol on the map and
mapped residences are indicated with a small house symbol on the map.
Phone selections (symbol and label) that are placed on the map appear in red
if they have been located reliably to a street address. Otherwise, the
approximate location appears light gray on the map.
• Click a listing in the Selections area and click Remove (or right-click a listing
and click Remove) to remove the phone book listing from your list of
selections.
• Click Remove All (or right-click on your selections and click Remove All) to
remove all of the phone book listings from the Selection area. All mapped
selections will be removed from the map.
• Click To File to save all of the phone book listings in the Selections area in a
.txt file. The default location is C:\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.
• Click To XData to copy all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to
the XData tab as a dataset (using the Import Wizard).
• Click a previously mapped listing in the Selections area to highlight it on the
map.
• Double-click a listing in the Selections area to center the map on that listing.
Note You can also copy, search, and sort search results and selections using right-click
mouse options.
Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road
This Help topic describes functionality that is available only in Street Atlas USA
Plus.
You can right-click a road to view all of the residential and business phone book listings on
that road.
Notes
• A hyphen (-) before the name in a search result indicates a business listing.
• An asterisk (*) before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call
preference.The person or business listed has registered a preference to not be
solicited by telephone (as provided by law). DeLorme products cannot be relied
upon as a method for legal compliance with state and federal regulations. A
number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of the following is true:
The phone number is unlisted. Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to have
their phone number be available from directory assistance but not published in
any phone directories.
112

Searching for Phone Book Listings
Note Customers paying for non-published service desire complete privacy of
their phone number, which means it is not published in the phone book and is
unavailable from directory assistance. Non-published numbers are not available in
Phone Data.
The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission's National Do Not Call
Registry.
You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your registration at
https://www.donotcall.gov.
The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations.
You can register your preference for mail and e-mail solicitations with the Direct
Marketing Association at http://www.the-dma.org/
• Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the Phone text
boxes.
• Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do not
know the state for your query.
To Find Phone Information for a Specific Road
Use the following steps to find available phone information for a specific road. If you did not
install the phone data to your hard drive, you can use the DVD.
1. To find all of the phone listings for a particular address, search for a phone book
listing, right-click a search result, and then click Search This Address.
All of the phone listings for that address display.
OR
To find phone information using the map, pan the map or click the Find tab and use
the QuickSearch function to locate the road you want to use for your phone book
listing search. Then, right-click the road and click Phone Listings.
All the phone book listings for that road (in that city) display in the Search Results
area on the lower-right corner of the dialog area.
Notes If more than 1,000 search results match your search criteria, the More
button becomes activated. Click More to browse to the next 1,000 search results.
2. Click one or more search results in the Search Results area and then click Add (or
right-click the search results and click Add) to add your search result to the
Selection area on the lower-right corner of the dialog area.
Note Press the CTRL key on your keyboard to select more than one search result at
a time. You can also double-click a search result to add it to the Selections area.
OR
Click Add All (or right-click the search results and click Add All) to include all of
your search results to the Selection area.
Note The Selection area has a 1,000 listing limit, as described in the license
agreement.
OR
Click Clear All (or right-click on the search results and click Clear All) to remove all
of the search results from the Selection area.
3. Use one of the following options to modify the selections in the Selections area:
• Click Map (or right-click on your selections and click Map) to add your phone
book listings to the map. If only one item is selected, the map centers on the
object. To add all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to the map,
by right-click the selections, point to Select All in the menu, and then click
Map. To view details about a phone selection once it's on the map, right-click
its symbol and click Info.
113

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Note Mapped businesses are indicated with a square symbol on the map and
mapped residences are indicated with a small house symbol on the map.
Phone selections (symbol and label) that are placed on the map appear in red
if they have been located reliably to a street address. Otherwise, the
approximate location appears light gray on the map.
• Click a listing in the Selections area and click Remove (or right-click a listing
and click Remove) to remove the phone book listing from your list of
selections.
• Click Remove All (or right-click your selections and click Remove All) to
remove all of the phone book listings from the Selection area. All mapped
selections are removed from the map.
• Click To File to save all of the phone book listings in the Selections area in a
.txt file.
The default location for the file is C:\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.
• Click To XData to copy all of the phone book listings in the Selections area to
the XData tab as a dataset (using the XData Import Wizard).
Note This option is unavailable when the XData tab is hidden with Tab
Manager.
• Click a previously mapped listing in the Selections area to highlight it on the
map.
• Double-click a listing in the Selections area to center the map on that listing.
114

Using XData
XData Overview
• XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
• Supported file formats include:
• Microsoft® Access (.mdb, .mdw, and .mda)
• Microsoft Excel (.xls)
• Microsoft Visual FoxPro (.dbf)
• dBase (.dbf)
• Text files (.txt, .csv, .tab, and .asc)
• XData labels, names, and URLs cannot be more than 255 characters.
You can use the XData tab to import your data so you can view the location of each record
on detailed maps. To geoplace (locate) your records on the map, the data file must contain
either a coordinate (in decimal degrees), a city and state, a ZIP/Postal Code, or a complete
physical address (street address, city, state) for each record.
Whatever your business needs, you have powerful database management tools to help you
plan accordingly.
You can:
• Import most database, spreadsheet, and text file formats for use within the
program.
• Select symbols (or design your own) to represent the locations of your records.
• Display or hide databases so you can use them one at a time or together. You can
also use your data with other program functions.
• Customize an existing dataset and then save the new dataset by using the Export
function.
• Create a route using your XData records as a start, stop, and/or finish point.
Importing Data
You can import your own data and view the location of each record on detailed maps. To
locate (or geoplace) your records on the map, the file must contain either a coordinate, a
ZIP/Postal Code, or a complete physical address (street address, city, state) for each
record.
• XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
• Supported file formats include:
• Microsoft® Access (.mdb, .mdw, and .mda)
• Microsoft Excel (.xls)
• Microsoft Visual FoxPro (.dbf)
• dBase (.dbf)
• Text files (.txt, .csv, .tab, and .asc)
• XData labels, names, and URLs cannot be more than 255 characters.
115

Street Atlas USA User Guide
To Import a Database
Use the following steps to import a database into the current map file.
1. Click the XData tab.
Each dataset included in the current map file is listed under Available Datasets.
Note If the check box is selected, it indicates that the dataset is displayed on the
map. Clear the check box to hide the dataset's symbols on the map.
2. Click Import to open the Import Wizard.
3. On the Select Data Source screen, click Data Source to locate and select the file
from the Open dialog box and then click Next.
Note If your file is not available in the directory as expected, you may need to
change the file type in the Files of Type drop-down list.
4. If your data source is a .csv or .txt file, complete this step. If not, go to step 5.
The Select Schema screen displays. Verify how the data displays in the columns. If it
is not displaying correctly, under Schema Type, select the option that separates
your data into the appropriate columns. If your first row is not a header row, clear
the First Row is Header check box. Click Next. The Assign Field Types screen
displays.
Notes
• Select Other under Schema Type to use a non-standard file schema definition.
You can then select any combination of Tab, Space, Comma, and Other. If you
select Other under Delimiter, type the character(s) that separate your data in the
text entry box.
• The First Row is Header check box is selected by default. The program attempts
to automatically assign field names based on the data in the first row.
5. Select the column you want to display as a label on the map using the available radio
buttons.
Note You can clear a selection to have no label displayed on the map.
6. Click the Assignment header for each column and select the appropriate field option
from the menu.
The Status text box indicates how your data will be geoplaced on the map.
7. Select how you want to locate your field information (street address or ZIP/Postal
Code).
Note The available Locate By options are based on which fields have been assigned to the
columns.
8. Click Next.
The Select Data Symbol screen displays.
9. Under Match Status, click Exact, Street Name, Area, or ZIP Center and then
select the unique symbol and text properties you want to display for each match status.
Assigning different symbols/text to your records based on match status shows a visual
representation on the map of which records in your dataset were geoplaced exactly, only by
street name, only by area, or only by ZIP Center.
OR
Under Match Status, select the Use the same symbol/text for all categories check box
to identify all of your records on the map using the same symbol without taking match
status into consideration.
Note Click Edit to use XSym to create a new symbol or edit an existing symbol. For more
information, see topics listed under Custom Symbols in the Draw section of the Help.
10. Click Next.
The Data Options screen displays.
116

Using XData
11. Type the name for the dataset along with any additional identifying comments.
The date and time of creation are automatically recorded.
12. Click Finish.
A progress bar displays with the status of matched records. When the import process is
complete, the dialog box automatically closes, the dataset name displays in the Available
Datasets list, and the symbol you chose displays on the map for every record which was
geolocated.
Note Datasets have .dds extensions and are saved by default to C:\DeLorme
Docs\Datasets.
Note If you decide to interrupt the import process, you can finish importing the dataset
later by selecting the dataset from the Available Datasets list in the XData tab and then
clicking Resume.
Managing Datasets
XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
You can manage your dataset after you have imported/copied it as a dataset.
To Manage Your Datasets
Use the following steps to manage your datasets.
1. Click the XData tab.
A list of the datasets available in the current map file displays in the Available
Datasets window. From this screen you can:
• Update the symbols in the selected dataset by clicking Symbolize and
updating the symbol properties.
• Delete the selected dataset by clicking Delete. The dataset is deleted from
the map, the current map file, and from your computer.
• View the records within the selected dataset by clicking Query. For more
information, see Viewing Dataset Records.
Note A selected check box indicates that the dataset is displayed on the map. Clear
the check box to hide the dataset's symbols on the map.
2. Click a dataset to select it and then click the Query subtab. You can then:
• Edit a record in the dataset by double-clicking inside the cell you want to edit or by
right-clicking the record (in the Query subtab) and clicking Edit.
• Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance through the cells in the record.
When you are finished editing the record, press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
• Create a route using a record in the dataset by right-clicking the record you want to
use as your start, stop, or finish route point, clicking Route, and then clicking the
route option.
• Add a blank record to the end of the records list by clicking Add.
• Duplicate a record in the dataset by right-clicking the record and clicking Duplicate
Record(s). Duplicates of the records will be available at the bottom of the record
list.
• Delete a record in the dataset by selecting the record and clicking Delete or by
right-clicking the record and clicking Delete Record(s).
117

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Center the map on the selected dataset by double-clicking it or clicking Go To. The
map view changes to encompass all of the geoplaced records within that dataset.
Note To geoplace those records again, click GeoCode or right-click the records and
select GeoCode Record(s).
• Center the map on a particular record by double-clicking the first column of the
record or by selecting the record and clicking Go To.
Viewing Dataset Records
XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
After you have imported your data as a dataset, you can view information about the
dataset, view the data records within a dataset, and select a specific record and view its
symbol on the map.
To View Records
Follow the steps below to view records within a particular dataset.
1. Click the XData tab.
A list of the datasets available in the current map file is displayed in the Available
Datasets window.
Note A selected check box indicates that the dataset is being displayed on the map.
Clear the check box to hide the dataset's symbols on the map.
2. Click a dataset to select it.
The name, date, and time that the dataset was created display in the Dataset
Statistics window. Any additional comments that you added during the import
process also display here.
3. Click Query.
The records for the selected dataset display in the records window. You can then:
• View a dataset other than the one currently selected by selecting the dataset
from the Use Dataset drop-down list. The records contained within the
dataset display in the table below. The Located To column indicates how each
record was geoplaced on the map (by Address, ZIP/Postal Code, Street,
Coordinate).
Note You can adjust the size of the tab area to expand the table.
• Limit which records of the dataset display in the table by selecting one of the
options from the Table Display drop-down list. Some of the Table Display
options provide additional drop-down lists to choose a more limited query. For
example, selecting the Records by Placement option provides an additional
drop-down list of options so you can choose to display only those records
placed to specific addresses, only those records placed manually, and so on.
Additional Viewing Tips
The following list provides information on how to view records or obtain information about
the dataset symbols on the map while in the Query dialog area.
• To select records and view the corresponding symbol on the map:
• To select one record, click the record.
• To select multiple records individually, press the CTRL key on your keyboard
while clicking each of the individual records.
118

Using XData
• To select a block of records, press the SHIFT key while clicking the record at
the beginning of the block, and then click the record at the end of the block.
All of the records are selected.
• To center the map on the selected record(s), click Go To.
Note To geoplace records again, click GeoCode.
• To delete one or more records within the dataset, while in the Query dialog area,
select each record using one of the methods described above and then click Delete.
Click Yes to confirm the deletion. Deleted records are unrecoverable.
• To view the record of a particular dataset symbol on the map, click Select and then
click the symbol on the map. Only the corresponding records display in the record
window.
• To resize columns, place the pointer near the column border in the header of the
desired column. When the pointer changes to a double arrow, drag the column in the
direction you want to increase or decrease its size.
• To arrange the records in ascending order according to a particular column, click the
header of that column. Click the column header again to arrange the records in
descending order.
Creating a Route with XData Records
XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
Once you import an XData dataset, you can use the individual records within the dataset to
create a route.
To Create a Route with XData Records
Use the following steps to create a route with XData records.
1. Import a database into the XData tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. Right-click the record you want to use as a start for your route, click Route, and
then click Set as Start.
4. Optional. Right-click the record you want to use as a stop in your route, click Route,
and then click Insert as Stop to add the stop geographically in the route or click
Add as Stop to add the stop in the order it was added to the route.
5. Right-click the record you want to use as a finish in your route, click Route, and
then click Set as Finish.
Geocoding or Moving a Record's Location
XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
During the import process, the program attempts to geocode all records. This means it
places the symbol for the record on specific map coordinates (based on address or
coordinate information). Once you have imported your data, you may want to make
changes to the data and manually geocode each record to a new location. How an item has
been located displays in the Located To column of the dataset's records.
To Move a Record's Location
119

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to move a record's location.
1. Click the XData tab.
2. Click Query.
3. Select the dataset you want to view from the Use Dataset drop-down list.
4. Select Records by Placement from the Table Display drop-down list.
5. Select All Placed Records from the Record Placement drop-down list.
6. Scroll right to the Located To column and view how each record in the dataset was
placed.
You can manually geocode any item listed as Not Placed or ZIP Code.
7. Select the record you want to move.
8. To manually place a record that has not been placed on the map, drag the record
from the table to the location on the map. The Located To field for that record now
reads as Manual Placement.
OR
Click GeoCode to geocode a record again.
OR
Right-click the record(s) and then click GeoCode Record(s).
Exporting Data
XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
You can export datasets to another dataset or a text file. It is important to export datasets
because:
• If you have modified a dataset after you have imported it, you may want to save the
new dataset for use in as a dataset in your application or as a text file.
• If you have exported a copied dataset (resulting from conducting a phone book
listing search) and then used the To XData function within the Phone tab, you can
modify and export it to a new dataset or export it as a text file.
To Export Data
Use the following steps to export data.
1. Click the XData tab.
2. Click Query.
3. Select a dataset from the Use Dataset drop-down list.
The records contained within the dataset display in the records window.
4. To limit which records of the dataset are available for export, you can:
Select one of the options from the Table Display drop-down list.
OR
Select records manually from the existing dataset. To select multiple records
individually, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking each of the desired
records. To select a block of records, press the SHIFT key while clicking the record at
the beginning of the block, and then click the record at the end of the block; all of
the records between the two you clicked are now selected.
5. Click Export.
6. Under Export Options, select one of the following options:
120

Using XData
• Export to New Dataset–Exports the file as a .dds file for use within the
program as another dataset.
• Export to Text File–Exports the file as a .txt file for use in other programs.
7. Under Records to Export, select one of the following options.
• Entire Dataset–Exports all records in the selected dataset, including records
that have not been placed.
• Records in List (#)–Exports the records currently displaying in the Query
table. The number of records is in parentheses. This may be a subset of the
dataset, if you selected one of the Table Display options from the drop-down
list in the Query dialog area.
• Only Selected (#)–Exports only those records currently selected in the
Query table. The number of records is in parentheses. These are the records
you selected manually.
8. To export your dataset as another dataset, click Create Dataset and follow the
instructions provided to select a data symbol for each match status, type a dataset
name, and select the map display option(s). Click Finish when prompted. Exported
files are available immediately in the Available Datasets list in the Datasets dialog
area of the XData tab. These files have .dds extensions and are saved by default in
C:\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.
OR
To export your dataset as a text file, make sure the Export to Text File option is
selected. Type the file name in the File text box and click Save. Exported files have
a .txt extension and are saved by default in the C:\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.
Printing XData Dataset Records
XData is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
You can print records from datasets imported with the XData tab. For information on
viewing records from imported datasets, see Viewing Dataset Records.
To Print XData Dataset Records
Use the following steps to print dataset records.
1. Click the XData tab and then click Query.
2. Select a dataset from the Use Dataset drop-down list. Set Table Display or Record
Placement options if they are available for your dataset.
3. Click the Print tab and then click XData to display the Print/XData dialog area.
The title of the currently selected dataset displays in a text box in the Dataset Print
Title area.
4. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box; select a printer, change
printer properties, select paper size, and select paper orientation. Click OK when
finished.
5. Click Columns to view the Columns display area if the Print dialog area is minimized.
6. Under Dataset Print Title, select the Print Title check box to display a title on
each printed page. Select the First Page Only check box to only display the title on
the first printed page.
Note Click Font to change the font, style, size, and/or script.
121

Street Atlas USA User Guide
7. Under Records, select an option.
Note Various options are available under the Records drop-down box depending on
options you chose under the Table Display drop-down box in the XData dialog area.
You can choose specific options available or to print All Records in the dataset.
Option
Print Column
Names
First Page Only
Print Column
Borders
Shade Alternate
Records
Action
Displays column names on each printed page. Clear
the check box to have no column names display.
Displays column names on the first page only. This
option is unavailable if the Print Column Names
check box is cleared.
Displays borders around table columns.
Displays shading in alternate rows in the table.
8. Under Columns, select an option.
Note Selected check boxes indicate the columns that will print. Clear a column
check box if you do not want the column to print or click:
• Select All to select and print all columns.
• Select None to clear all columns (no columns will print).
• Reverse Selection to alternate selections. For example if you have selected
columns 1, 3, and 5 to print and decide you want to print columns 2, 4, and 6
instead. The Reverse Selection option selects those columns that were
cleared.
9. When all options are selected, click Print.
Note For specific recommendations on best printing results, see your printer manual.
122

Using the Draw Tools
Draw Overview
You can add draw objects, such as routable roads, waypoints, tracks, text, symbols,
MapNotes, images, lines, arcs, splines, circles, polygons, and rectangles to your map with
the tools provided in the Draw tab.
To work with existing draw objects, you must first open the existing map file that contains
the object or draw file.
For more information, click the link for the version of the product you are using.
• Street Atlas USA Plus OR regular Street Atlas USA with Advanced File Management
What is a Draw File?
Imagine a draw file as a sheet of glass laying on top of your map. You can add
various objects to the draw file to help enhance or pinpoint specific areas on the
map, but these objects do not become part of the map. They exist in a draw file that
overlays the map.
• There are four different types of draw files: draw, road, waypoint, and track.
You can create more than one draw file and overlay one on top of the other
while still viewing the map beneath. See Editing/Locking Draw Files.
• A draw file is automatically generated the first time you add a draw object to
the map.
• You can save draw objects in a single draw file or in multiple draw files.
• Draw files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw with the default
name; for example, DrawLayer#.an1, with # indicating the number order in
which the file was created. You can rename draw files to better identify your
specific information. See Creating a New Draw File.
• You can view draw files individually or with other draw files.
• As you create draw files, they are added to the current map files.
• You can add draw files you create to multiple map files.
• When you clear or delete a draw file, the objects in the draw file do not
display and are deleted along with the draw file.
• You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area.
See Creating a New Draw File.
• You can display multiple draw files while working on your map. You can work
on one draw file at a time while viewing other files beneath it. You can select
different draw files to be the active, editable file from within the Draw tab.
See Editing/Locking Draw Files.
• Draw files created in a particular map file are displayed only if that map file is
currently displaying. For example, if DrawLayer27 is created in a map file
named Yarmouth Zoom 14 only, DrawLayer27 does not display if a map file
named Old Port is currently displaying.
• Routable roads are not tied to a map file; they do not change even when a
map file is changed.
What is a Draw Object?
123

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Draw objects are those objects you add to a draw file with the tools provided in the
Draw tab. Draw objects consist of line, area, or point objects. You can copy, move,
delete, and add draw objects to other draw files and add them to another map file.
• Line objects are those objects consisting of line segments and points, such
as:
• Routable Roads
• Tracks
• Lines
• Arcs
• Splines
• Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects,
such as:
• Polygons
• Rectangles
• Circles
• Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to either a waypoint,
symbol, MapNote, image, or text label. The anchor point is the pixel position
on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point
selected on the map when the symbol is placed.
• Draw objects added to a draw file contain points that give the object its shape
or allow you to snap one object to another object. Points display and act in
different ways within the various draw objects. Click a link below to view
additional information.
Points in Routable Roads, Tracks, Lines, Splines, and Polygons
Draw objects such as routable roads, tracks, lines, splines, and polygons consist of
shape points and end points.
Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object. They
give the object its shape. When you select a draw object on the map, shape points
display along the active object as small magenta squares.
The line object below was drawn with the spline tool.
End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw object.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line, spline, or
polygon:
A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment.
A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment.
The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.
Notes
124

Using the Draw Tools
• When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line
draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available (when using
the Polygon or Line tool) and selected, it displays the bearing or angle of that
point of the line, the length of the line segment (leg), and the total length of
the entire line object on the map.
• When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon
draw object, a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line,
the length of the line segment (leg), and the total area of the polygon on the
map.
Points in Rectangles, Circles, and Arcs
Draw objects such as rectangles, circles, and arcs also contain points, but they are
treated differently.
Rectangles—;Contain shape points at the four corners, but the lines between the
shape points contain no editable end points. When you click one of these shape
points, a text box displays the width, height, and area of the rectangle on the map.
Circles—;Contain no shape points, but have a central point that does not display
until you snap it (see Note below) to another object. Clicking the circle displays a
central crosshair within the circle and a text box containing information on the area
and radius of the circle on the map.
Arcs—;Contain three shape points. When you click any of the points, a text box
displays the angle or bearing of the selected point, the radius of the arc, and the
total length of the arc line on the map.
Only the first and second points you placed on the map when creating the arc are
treated as start and end points (i.e., show red or green when clicked). The central
magenta shape point, or third point you placed, determines the shape of the arc.
Note For information on snapping a draw object to another draw object, see
Snapping Draw Objects.
Points in Draw Objects
Point Objects, such as waypoints, symbols, and text, do not have shape or end
points. Text label objects contain a point at the bottom center of the text label box
and are only visible during a snap.
Points in MapNotes
MapNotes do not have shape or end points. They contain an anchor point at the end
of the text box. Click the MapNote to display a central crosshair at the anchor point.
• Regular Street Atlas USA with Simplified File Management
If you are using Street Atlas USA with simplified file management, draw objects are
saved in the map file rather than in a draw layer.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
Some of the information in this Help topic describes functionality provided in
advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
125

Street Atlas USA User Guide
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools
The Draw tab tools allow you to add routable roads, waypoints, tracks, lines (straight lines,
arcs, and splines), shapes (polygons, rectangles, and circles), MapNotes, text labels,
images, and symbols to a draw file. Some of these tools are hidden tools available in pullout
menus.
To View the Hidden Draw Tools
Five draw tool options have pull-out menus with hidden tools. These draw tools each have a
small arrow at the bottom-right of the draw tool button as shown in this sample .
Use the following steps to view the hidden draw tools.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold one of the visible tools shown below to display and select one of the
options. Selecting a hidden tool changes the default option.
Waypoints/Tracks Tool
Line/Arc/Spline Tool
Polygon/Rectangle/Circle Tool
MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image Tool
Draw File Management
Creating a New Draw File
There are four different types of draw files:
• DrawLayer—Created when you add a line, arc, spline, circle, rectangle, polygon,
symbol, MapNote, or text label to the map.
• RoadLayer—Created when you add a routable road.
• WaypointLayer—Created when you add a waypoint to the map.
• TrackLayer—Created when you add a track to the map.
A draw file is automatically created when you add a draw object to the map and there are
no draw files of that type included in or contained in the current map file.
You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area.
To Create a New Draw File
Use the following steps to create a new draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
126

Using the Draw Tools
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A selected check box next to the draw file's name in the file list indicates the file is
displaying on the map.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type. For example, all
roadlayer files are grouped together in the list, all drawlayer files are grouped
together, and so on.
3. Click New and then click Draw, Road, Waypoint, or Track.
The new file is now the active draw file. Each draw file type has an active file.
4. Optional. If you want to rename the draw file:
Right-click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename. Type the
new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again (do not doubleclick).
Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
5. Optional. If you want to ensure no changes are made to a particular draw file, select
the Lock check box for that draw file in the draw file editing area.
6. Click Save.
7. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note You can save new draw files any time. For more information, see Saving a Draw File.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Saving a Draw File
After you finish adding draw objects to a draw file, you can save them in a draw file that
you can view or edit later. Any time you edit a draw file, click Save to save your changes.
To Save a New Draw File
Use the following steps to save a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File.
3. Click Save.
Draw files are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Draw with .an1 extensions.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
127

Street Atlas USA User Guide
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Deleting a Draw File
You can delete a draw file you just created or one you previously saved.
To Delete a Draw File
Use the following steps to delete a draw file.
1. Open the map file that contains the draw file you want to delete.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type (for example, all
road layers are grouped together in the list, all draw layers are grouped together,
and so on).
4. Select a draw file from the file list and then click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
OR
Right-click the draw file in the list and click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
5. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Hiding Draw Files
You can hide draw files you created. This removes from view all the draw objects in that file
without permanently deleting them.
To Hide a Draw File
Use the following steps to hide a draw file.
128

Using the Draw Tools
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type. For example, all
road layers are grouped together in the list, all draw layers are grouped together,
and so on.
3. Hide any files in the file list by clearing the check box next to the file name.
• A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map.
• A draw file with a cleared check box does not display on the map.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Editing/Locking Draw Files
You can edit the current active (editable) draw file. You can also lock a draw file, making it
uneditable.
To Edit a Draw File
Use the following steps to edit a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Verify the draw file you want to edit is displaying on the map. A draw file with a
selected check box displays on the map.
4. Verify that the file is selected in the Active column in the file editing area.
5. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
6. Click the Select tool and then click the draw file object on the map that you
want to edit.
7. Click File and then click Save to save the changes you made to the draw file.
8. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
To Lock a Draw File
Use the following steps to lock a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
129

Street Atlas USA User Guide
3. Select the Lock check box for each draw file you want to lock.
Note Clear the Lock check box to make changes to a draw file.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files
You can export draw files as text files. Draw objects exported to text files contain coordinate
information for each line, area, or point object. You can open these text files in other
DeLorme products.
To Export Draw Files to Text Files
Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column shows
the active layers.
3. From the file list, click the draw file to export.
4. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
5. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of
C:\DeLorme Docs\Export.
6. Select Text File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
7. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is root name of
the layer.
8. Click Save.
9. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
130

Using the Draw Tools
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files
You can export track or waypoint files as GPX files. GPX files derived from tracks contain the
elevation, time, and GPS status for each point in the track. GPX files derived from a
waypoint file include the waypoint name, comment, URL, lat/lon, elevation, time, GPS
status and the symbol name. You cannot export more than one waypoint/track layer into a
single GPX file.
To Export Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files
Use the following steps to export an existing track or waypoint file to a GPX file.
1. Open the map file containing the track or waypoint file you want to export.
OR
Create a new track or waypoint file for exporting.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column shows
the active layers.
4. Select the track or waypoint file to export from the file list.
5. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
6. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination of
C:\DeLorme Docs\Export.
7. Select GPX File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
8. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is DrawExport.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Importing Files to Draw Files
You can import many types of files as draw files. The file items display as draw objects
within the draw file.
131

Street Atlas USA User Guide
You can also use the Exchange dialog to download waypoint and tracks to the Draw tab. See
the Help topics under Exchanging Information with a Third-party GPS Device for more
information.
See the chart at the end of this topic to learn what is imported for each type of file.
Important To add a track Draw file (*.an1), to a map file, click the Add button on the Map
Files tab. For more information, see Editing a Map File.
To Import Files
Use the following steps to import a file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Click Import.
The Import Draw File dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the source folder of the file. The default location is C:\DeLorme
Docs\Export.
5. From the Files of type drop-down list, select the type of file you want to import.
6. If you selected GPS Log File format, select how you want the file to display on the
map from the Import As drop-down list.
7. Select the file and then click Open. The draw objects in the imported file display. A
new draw file is automatically created for the imported file.
8. Click Done to return to the Draw dialog area.
Notes
You can import a file containing survey information as long as the survey information is
formatted correctly.
• The file must start with Begin Survey and end with End.
• The second line must be a coordinate.
• The remainder of the file can be made up of lines or arcs. A line is defined by
direction and length.
• A curve is defined by the word curve, followed by a letter representing the side of
the arc to put the radius. This is followed by the length of the radius and the length
of the arc. The arc is completed with a bearing from the start to finish point.
• For more information, see Sample Survey File.
Street Atlas USA only
This Help topic describes functionality that's provided in advanced file
management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single Map File. Simplified file management lets you save only one route and/or
draw layer in a single Map File. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
If you import this
type of file...
That results from this
source...
The following is imported...
132

Using the Draw Tools
Address Book (.txt,
.csv)
Address Book File
Draw objects display with the
current symbol and style
selections.
Notes
Files must be tab or commadelimited.
Format: name, address, city,
state, ZIP Code, phone.
Files must be less than 250
records long.
Text File (.txt) Lat/Lon Text File Draw objects display with the
current symbol and line style
selections.
GPS Log File (.gpl)
GPX File (.gpx)
Location File (.loc)
Magellan Track File
(.log)
Magellan Waypoint
File (.upt)
Any DeLorme product that
supports GPS tracking
DeLorme product or thirdparty
application
Waypoint file from
www.geocaching.com
Magellan Track Log
Magellan Waypoint File
Line or waypoint object displays
with the current line preferences.
May contain one or more routes,
tracks, or waypoints, as well as
comments.
Note
When you import a GPX file, all
the waypoints, tracks,
comments, and routes found in
the file are imported at the same
time.
Coordinate information, name,
and URL link.
Latitude, longitude, elevation,
name and date/time (if
specified).
Latitude, longitude, elevation,
name, comment, and symbol are
imported.
Draw Layer Files Topo USA 2.0 (.ano) Draw objects display with the
current symbol and line style
selections.
MapDocs (.sa7, .sa8,
.sa9, .mn5, .mn6,
.mn7)
• Street Atlas USA 8.0,
8.0, and 9.0.
• AAA Map'n'Go 5.0, 6,
and 8.0
Draw objects display with the
current symbol and line style
selections.
Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File
These are the formatting conventions, with examples, for creating a text file to import as a
draw file.
133

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Draw Object Format Example
Line
Spline
Arc
Polygon
Rectangle
Circle
Symbol
BEGIN LINE
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
END
BEGIN SPLINE
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
END
BEGIN ARC
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
END
BEGIN POLY
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
LAT, LON
END
BEGIN CIRCLE
LAT, LON, Radius
END
BEGIN SYMBOL
LAT, LON, Name, Symbol
Name
END
BEGIN LINE
43.807801,-70.164440
43.807629,-70.163801
43.807211,-70.162746
43.806707,-70.163400
43.806696,-70.163905
43.807125,-70.164768
43.807801,-70.164440
END
BEGIN SPLINE
43.807801,-70.164440
43.807629,-70.163801
43.807211,-70.162746
43.806707,-70.163400
43.806696,-70.163905
43.807125,-70.164768
43.807801,-70.164440
END
BEGIN ARC
43.807801,-70.164440
43.807704,-70.162775
43.807211,-70.162746
43.807430,-70.163644
END
BEGIN POLY
43.808692,-70.165392
43.808692,-70.162493
43.806621,-70.162493
43.806621,-70.165392
43.808692,-70.165392
END
BEGIN CIRCLE
43.807662,-
70.163935,0.114611
END
BEGIN SYMBOL
43.807662,-
70.163935,DeLorme, Blue
Pin
END
134

Using the Draw Tools
MapNote
Text Label
BEGIN NOTE
LAT, LON, Text
END
BEGIN TEXT
LAT, LON, Text
END
BEGIN NOTE
43.807662,-
70.163935,DeLorme
END
BEGIN TEXT
43.807662,-
70.163935,DeLorme
END
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File
Map lines that you can copy to draw objects include segments of all types of roads and
highways, railroads, power lines, pipelines, rivers or streams, Zip Code boundaries, and grid
lines.
To Copy a Map Line
Use the following steps to copy a map line to a draw file.
1. Pan the map and zoom to the data zoom level.
OR
Open the map file with the map view you want.
2. Right-click the object on the map you want to bring into the draw file, point to
Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw Object, and then click the object in the list.
The object is copied into the draw file using the current line style selections.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Saving a Track as a GPS Log
135

Street Atlas USA User Guide
You can save any track as a GPS log with the right-click feature.
To Save a Track as a GPS Log
Use the following steps to save a track as a GPS log.
1. Place a track on the map.
2. Right-click the track, point to Manage Draw, and then click Save as GPS Log File.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the .gpl file. The default location is
C:\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs.
4. Type the file name in the File Name text box.
5. Click Save.
The original track is retained in its draw file and a new GPS log is created.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Viewing the Contents of a Draw File
Once you create a draw file (draw, road, waypoint, or track layer), you can view the
contents of that file using the More button in the File view of the Draw tab.
To View the Contents of a Draw File
Use the following steps to view the contents of a draw, road, waypoint, or track file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to view.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file contents table displays. The information
that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
• Draw layer contents include the draw object label (name), comments about
the draw object, the URL assigned when the draw object was added to the
map, the date and time the object was last modified, and the draw object
type (symbol, line, polygon, circle, etc.).
• Road layer contents include the routable road name, comments about the
routable road, the URL assigned when the routable road was added to the
map, the date and time the routable road was last modified, and the length of
the road (in the measurement chosen in the Display settings).
136

Using the Draw Tools
• Waypoint layer contents include comments about the waypoint, the URL
assigned when the waypoint was added to the map, the date and time the
waypoint was last modified, the coordinates of the waypoint, and the symbol
name.
• Track layer contents include comments about the track, the URL assigned
when the track was added to the map, the date and time the track was last
modified, the start and finish time of the track, the total time of the track, the
distance of the track (in the measurement chosen in the Display settings),
and the number of readings that the track includes.
5. Optional. Double-click a draw object in the table to center the map on its location.
OR
Right-click the draw object in the table and click Go To.
6. Optional. To sort the columns of data in the table in ascending order, click the
column header. Click the column header again to sort in descending order.
7. Optional. To modify a draw object's name, comment, or URL, in the table, click the
draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again (do not double-click).
Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename. Type the
new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Note To add a line break to text in the Comment field, press CTRL+ENTER on your
keyboard.
8. Optional. To view the contents of a track file in a dialog box, right click the file in the
draw file editing area and click Details.
9. Optional. To launch a Web browser for a draw object that includes a URL, right-click
the file in the draw file editing area and click Launch Browser.
10. Optional. To delete a draw object, click the draw object in the table and click the
Delete button.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
OR
Right-click the draw object in the table and click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel.
11. Optional. Click Less to return the tab height to its default height.
Note To edit the Comments field, click once in the cell, type your text in the box, and then
press ENTER on your keyboard. When you hover your cursor over a comment, the entire
comment displays as a ToolTip.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
137

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Copying a Draw File
You can copy the contents of an existing file and save it as a different file type (for example,
convert a road layer to a draw layer).
To Copy a Draw File
Use the following steps to copy a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Click to select the file that you want to copy.
4. Click Copy To.
A menu displays the available layer types; Road, Waypoint, or Track.
Note If a layer type is not available in the menu, it is because the original draw file
that you are copying does not contain data that is pertinent to that file type. For
example, you cannot copy a draw layer that contains area objects (such as circles) to
a road layer that requires line objects.
A new file is created and inserted into the table.
Tip You can also change a draw object type using the right-click feature. For more
information, see Changing Draw Object Types.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Changing Draw Object Types
When you add a draw object to the map, a draw file is automatically created that includes
that object. The draw file type varies depending on the draw object that was created.
Draw Object Type
Routable Road
Waypoint
Track
Area Object (Polygon, Circle, Rectangle)
Draw File Type
Road Layer
Waypoint Layer
Track Layer
Draw Layer
Point Object (MapNote, Text Label, Symbol,
Image)
Line Object (Line, Arc, Spline)
138

Using the Draw Tools
You can right-click a draw object on the map and change it to a road, track, waypoint, or
draw layer, depending on the type of draw object you selected. When the draw file type is
changed, the original draw file is maintained and a copy is made and switched to the new
draw file type, leaving you with two files: the original draw file and the copied draw file,
which has a new draw file type.
To Change a Draw Object
Use the following steps to change a draw object type.
1. Use the Draw tab to place a draw object on the map.
2. To change a track or line to a road layer, right-click the object on the map, point to
Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Road Layer.
OR
To change a routable road to a track layer, right-click the object on the map, point to
Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Track Layer.
OR
To change a routable road, waypoint, or track to a draw layer, right-click the object
on the map, point to Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw Object, and then click
the object to copy to.
OR
To create a copy of an existing area object, point object, or line object, right-click the
object on the map, point to Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw Object, and
then click the object to copy to.
OR
To change a track to a GPS log, right-click the track on the map, point to Manage
Draw, and click Copy Track to GPS Log.
OR
To change a symbol to a waypoint, right-click the symbol on the map, point to
Manage Draw, and click Copy Symbol to Waypoint.
Tip You can also change a draw file type using the File section of the Draw tab. For more
information, see Copying a Draw File.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Renaming a Draw File
Once you create a draw file, you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map.
To Rename a Draw File
Use the following steps to rename a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
139

Street Atlas USA User Guide
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Right-click the draw file and click Rename.
The file name area activates.
OR
Click within the file name cell once. Then, click it again (do not double click).
The file name area activates.
4. Type the new file name in the cell and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another
You can copy draw objects from one draw file to another using the right-click feature in the
draw file list. Copying retains the draw object in the original draw file while placing a copy of
it in a selected draw file. If you want to move a draw object to another draw file, see Moving
a Draw Object to a Different Draw File.
To Copy a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
Use the following steps to copy a draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The information
that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object that you want to copy to another draw file, point to Copy
To, and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to.
The draw object remains in the original draw file and is copied to the selected draw
file.
Note To select multiple draw objects in the file list, press and hold the CTRL key
and click each file OR to select multiple sequential files, press and hold the SHIFT
key and click the first and last file.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
140

Using the Draw Tools
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
You can move a draw object to a different draw file using the right-click feature in the draw
file list. In order to move a draw object to another draw file, a secondary, compatible draw
file must exist.
Moving a draw object removes it from the current draw file. If you do not want to remove it,
but copy it to another draw file, see Copying a Draw Object from One Draw File to Another.
To Move a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
Use the following steps to move a draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check box
displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy.
4. Click More. The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The
information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object you want to move, point to Move To, and then click the
draw file you want to copy the object to—all compatible draw files display in the
Move To list.
The draw object is moved to the new destination.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Using Draw Objects
Copying and Placing Draw Objects
You can copy any draw object you place on the map.
141

Street Atlas USA User Guide
To Copy Draw Objects
Use the following steps to copy draw objects.
1. Open the map file that contains the draw object you want to copy.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. To copy a single draw object, click the Select tool and then click the draw object
on the map. A box displays around the active object.
OR
To copy multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
the draw objects you want to copy.
4. To copy, press the CTRL+C keys on your keyboard.
and then drag a box over
5. To paste, press CTRL+V on your keyboard. The newly copied object is placed directly
on top of the original (copied) object.
6. To move the copied object, use the table below.
If the draw object is a...
Routable Road, Track,
Line, Arc, Spline, Polygon,
Rectangle, Circle, or
MapNote
Symbol or Text
Then...
Press and hold the SHIFT
key on your keyboard and
drag the object to the new
location.
Drag the object to the new
location.
Tips
• To undo the move of the pasted draw object, click the Undo button to undo the
last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button .
• If you undo the first move of the pasted object, the object is placed back on top of
the original (copied) object.
• To copy and move a single object, select the draw object you want to copy, press the
CTRL key on your keyboard, and drag the draw object to the new location.
• If the item you copied does not successfully paste, it may be because you clicked out
of the map display. To focus the cursor back on the map, click inside the map
display. Then, try pasting again.
Moving Draw Objects
You can move any draw object you place on the map using the Draw tab from one location
to another.
To Move Draw Objects
Use the following steps to move draw objects.
1. Open the map file that contains the object you want to move.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click the Select tool and click the draw object you want to move. A box displays
around the active object.
You can move draw objects in different ways:
142

Using the Draw Tools
If the object is a(n)...
Routable Road, Track, Line,
Arc, Spline, Polygon, Rectangle,
or Circle
Symbol or Text
MapNote
Then...
Press and hold the SHIFT key on your
keyboard and drag the object to the new
location.
OR
Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to
move the object up, down, right, or left.
Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to
move the object up, down, right, or left.
OR
Drag it to the new location.
To move the entire MapNote, press and
hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and
drag the object to the new location, or
position your cursor between the MapNote
text and the anchor and drag the entire
MapNote to the desired location.
OR
To move the MapNote's anchor, drag the
MapNote's anchor to the new location.
OR
To move the MapNote's text, drag the
MapNote's text to the desired location.
Tip To undo a draw object move, click the Undo button to undo the last action. If
you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button .
Notes You can also move draw objects or their points by typing a new coordinate or
distance and bearing/angle number within the corresponding text boxes.
• Type new coordinates and click Apply to move circles, symbols, text, and
MapNotes. The whole object moves to the entered location. If you change the
distance and bearing numbers, the object moves in relationship to the object's
last location.
• Type new coordinates and click Apply to move individual end points (small red
circles) in line segments in routable roads, lines, splines, polygons, rectangles,
and arcs. If you change the distance and bearing numbers of the individual
points (not recommended for rectangles), the end point's distance and
bearing/angle change in relationship to the start point of the segment.
Renaming a Draw Object
Once you create a draw object, you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map.
To Rename a Draw Object in the File List
Note This option is available only with regular Street Atlas USA using Advanced File
Management or Street Atlas USA Plus.
Use the following steps to rename a draw object in the file list.
1. Click the Draw tab.
143

Street Atlas USA User Guide
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. Any draw file with a selected check
box displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the draw object you want to rename.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The information
that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object and select Rename.
OR
Click within the file name cell once. Then, click it again (do not double click).
6. The file name area activates. Type the file name and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
To Rename a Draw Object on the Map
Use the following steps to rename a draw object on the map.
1. Open the map file that contains the draw object you want to rename.
2. Right-click the waypoint, point to Manage Draw and click Edit Draw Object Text.
The waypoint text box opens.
Note If you have more than one waypoint close together, you may have to select
from a list.
OR
Click the Select tool , click the waypoint, and click the waypoint again (do not
double-click). The waypoint text box opens.
3. Type the new name in the box and press ENTER on your keyboard OR click away
from the box.
Deleting Draw Objects
Once you place a draw object on a draw file, you can delete the object. You can also delete
multiple or all draw objects in the active draw file.
To Delete One Draw Object
Use the following steps to delete a draw object.
1. Open the existing map file that contains the draw object you want to delete.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click the Select tool and then click the draw object on the map to select it. A
box displays around the selected object.
4. Click Delete in the Draw dialog area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the object and then select Manage Draw/Delete Draw Object.
Tip To bring back the last draw object you deleted, click the Undo button to undo the
last action. You can undo approximately 200 events in a single map file.
Note You can also delete a draw object using the right-click feature in the draw file list.
Click the File button in the Draw tab, click to select the Draw File that contains the object
you want to delete, click More, right-click the object, and then click Delete.
144

Using the Draw Tools
To Delete Multiple Draw Objects
Use the following steps to delete several draw objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To select multiple draw objects, click the Select tool , click the first draw object
on the map to select it, and then press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard
while clicking each additional draw object you want to delete. A box displays around
each selected object.
OR
To select multiple draw objects, click the Select tool , drag a box over the draw
objects you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button in the Draw dialog area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the object and then click Manage Draw/Delete Draw Object.
A message box displays asking if you want to delete the draw objects from the
current file.
• If you click Yes, all selected draw objects in the file are deleted. You cannot
undo this action.
• If you click No, no objects are cleared from the file.
To Delete All Draw Objects
To delete all draw objects from an unsaved draw file, click the Draw tab and, click a draw
object button that represents the draw file you want to clear (for example, if you want to
clear a RoadLayer, click the Routable Roads tool ) and then click Clear All. A message
box displays asking if you want to clear all draw objects from the current file.
• If you click Yes, all draw objects in the file are cleared. You cannot undo this
action.
• If you click No, no objects are cleared from the file.
Snapping Draw Objects
You can snap any draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw object.
You can also snap the central shape point of an arc to another object.
To Snap a Draw Object to the Coordinates of Another Object
Use the following steps to snap a draw object to the coordinates of another draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool and then click the draw object on the map.
A box displays around the active object. Shape points display as small, magenta
squares.
3. Select an end point from any of the line segments within the draw object.
It displays as a red or green circle.
4. Drag the point to:
• Any other shape point within a line, spline, polygon, arc, or rectangle.
• The center point of a circle.
145

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• The anchor of a symbol.
• The base point of a text label.
• The text box anchor point of a MapNote.
When you drag your shape point over a point on the draw object, a yellow diamond
defines the snap point . Release the point you dragged when the snap point
displays. The active draw object is then snapped to the other object's point
coordinate.
Tip To undo a draw object snap, click Undo to undo the last action. If you decide not to
undo the last action, click Redo.
Notes
• Do not snap one end point of an arc to the other end point in the same arc.
• To turn the snapping feature off, press the ALT key on the keyboard while dragging
the draw object.
To Snap the Central Shape Point of an Arc to Another Object
Use the following steps to snap the central shape point of the arc to another object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool and then click the arc on the map.
A box displays around the active object. Shape points display as small, magenta
squares.
3. While pressing the SHIFT key on the keyboard, drag the center point of the arc line
over a point on the draw object until the snap point (the yellow diamond) displays.
4. Release the arc. It is snapped to the other object's point coordinate.
Adding Points to Draw Objects
You can add points to routable road, line, spline, and polygon draw objects to change the
shape of the object.
To Add Points to Draw Objects
Use the following steps to add points to routable roads, lines, splines, and polygons.
1. In the Draw tab, click the Select tool , and then click the draw object you want
to edit.
A box displays around the line indicating it is active. The shape points of the draw
objects display as small, magenta squares.
2. Click the line between two shape points in the object and drag.
A new point is created, as well as a new line segment within the object. The new
segment displays with its first and last end points, as well as a text box indicating
the new point's bearing or angle, length of the new segment (leg), and total object's
length on the map.
Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object, click the Undo button to undo
the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button .
Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects
You can delete points from routable road, track, line, spline, and polygon draw objects to
change the shape of the object.
146

Using the Draw Tools
To Delete Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects
Use the following steps to delete points and line segments from draw objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool and click the draw object you want to edit.
A box displays around the line indicating it is active. The shape points of the linear
objects display as small, magenta squares.
3. Select the shape point.
The point displays as either a green or red end point depending upon the line
segment it is associated with.
4. Click Delete in the Draw display area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
The point is deleted, as well as the line segment within the draw object that was
associated with that point.
Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object, click the Undo button to undo
the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button .
Labeling a Draw Object
You can label any draw object. Once you label a draw object, you can search for it using the
QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the draw object label in any of the routing
fields in the Route tab.
To Label a Draw Object
See the labeling procedures below for each of the draw objects.
For this Draw Object...
Routable Roads
Arcs
Circles
Lines
Polygons
Rectangles
Splines
Tracks
Waypoints
Images
MapNotes
Symbols
Text Labels
Waypoints
Use this labeling procedure...
Type the name of the street in the text box available in the
Draw dialog area.
1. Place the object on the map.
2. Using the Select tool , click the draw object once.
A gray box displays around the draw object.
3. Click the draw object again. A text box displays.
4. Type the label name in the text box and then press the
ENTER key on your keyboard.
1. Place the object on the map.
The URL/Label (Street Atlas USA Plus) or Label
(Regular Street Atlas) text box opens.
2. Type the label for your draw object in the Label section
of the text box.
Note (Street Atlas USA Plus only) When viewing a
hyperlinked draw object on the map, the object displays as
an active hyperlink. If you want to click the object without
opening the hyperlink, press the CTRL key on your keyboard
147

Street Atlas USA User Guide
while you click the draw object.
Routable Roads, Tracks, Lines, Arcs, and Splines
Drawing Routable Roads on the Map
The Routable Road tool allows you to add a new road to a draw layer in the current map
file. You can then incorporate any new roads you add to a route when you create a route.
You must be at data zoom level 11-0 or greater when adding roads with the Routable Road
tool.
To Draw Routable Roads
Use the following steps to add routable roads to a road layer.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Routable Road tool .
3. Type the name of the road you want to add in the Road Name text box.
Name each routable road you add so you can locate it using the find feature.
4. Hover the mouse pointer over existing roads to display the yellow diamond symbol
. The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an existing road the point for your
new road will connect (connection point).
Notes
• The new road must connect to an existing non-limited access road for routing
to occur on the new road.
• Each time you intersect an existing road, hover the mouse over the road to
display the yellow diamond symbol and click to create a connection point
before continuing to draw. If you draw the line over the road without
creating a connection point, routing cannot occur along the intersection.
5. Once you locate the connection point for your new road, click the map to place the
first point. Click point-to-point or drag to add the new road to the draw layer.
The following information is available as you add each point in your road:
• The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes.
• The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes.
6. To finish the line draw for the new road, enter the last point on the map screen and
click Done.
The new road displays on the map with the name you typed in the Road Name text
box.
You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard or
double-clicking while entering the last point of the line.
Drawing a Line, Arc, or Spline on the Map
You can add lines, arcs, and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style, color, width,
and display them with map line features.
• Use lines to mark boundaries or to add railroads or utility lines. You can draw lines
with varied line styles, weights, and colors, including lines that reflect actual map
line types.
148

Using the Draw Tools
• Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file. You can draw arcs with varied
line styles, weights, and colors, including lines that reflect actual map line types.
Note An arc is created by entering only three points on the map. The first and
second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last arc base. The
third point, placed between the first two, determines the radius of the arc and fixes
the arc in place.
• Use splines to add map features that contain curves. You can draw splines with
varied line colors, weights, and styles, including lines that reflect actual map line
types.
Note As you draw a spline, points are entered in much the same way as those
entered when creating a line. The difference between a line and a spline is that when
you enter each point, the line segment between the points curves instead of staying
straight.
To Draw a Line, Arc, or Spline
Use the following steps to draw a line/arc/spline.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Line/Arc/Spline tool and select the tool you want.
3. Select a line/arc/spline style from the Style drop-down list.
4. Click the color button next to the Style drop-down list to select a line/arc/spline
color.
5. If available, select a line/arc/spline width from the Width drop-down list.
6. If available, select the Highlight check box to make your line/arc/spline appear
translucent on the map.
7. Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points
on the map as you draw the line/arc/spline.
As you add each point, a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing
or angle, leg (line segment) length, and total length of the line/arc/spline on the
map. Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box
is selected.
8. To draw a line or spline, click the map to designate the start and end points of each
line segment.
You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line.
OR
To draw an arc, click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc.
• The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the
right of the line options.
• The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes.
9. To finish the line/arc/spline, click the last point on the map screen and then click
Done.
OR
Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Double-click the last point of the line/arc/spline.
Drawing a Track on the Map
149

Street Atlas USA User Guide
You can add tracks to the map and adjust their line style, color, width, and display them
with map line features.
To Draw a Track
Use the following steps to draw a track.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Track/Waypoint tool and select the Track tool .
3. Select a track style from the Style drop-down list.
4. Click the color button next to the Style drop-down list to select a track color.
5. Select a track width from the Width drop-down list.
6. Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the map.
7. Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points
on the map as you draw the track.
As you add each point, a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing
or angle, leg (line segment) length, and total length of the track on the map. Labels
display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected.
8. Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment.
You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line.
• The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the
right of the line options.
• The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes.
9. To finish the track, click the last point on the map screen and then click Done.
OR
Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Double-click the last point of the track.
Tip To get information about a track, right-click it on the map and click Info. The Info tab
opens with information about the track.
Editing a Routable Road, Line, Arc, or Spline
Once you create a line object (routable road, line, arc, or spline) you can edit (including
reshaping or changing line color or width), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
To Edit a Line Object
Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road, line, arc, or spline.
1. Open the map file containing the draw layer with the line object you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the line object you want to edit is not active, click File and activate the draw file in
the file list. Then, click Done.
4. Click the Select tool and then click the line object you want to edit.
• A box displays around the selected line.
• The shape points used to create the line object display as small, magenta
squares.
5. Perform any of the following edits to the line object:
150

Using the Draw Tools
• To edit any label on the line object, select it twice, then type the label in the
text box that displays next to the line object.
OR
Select the line object and edit its label.
• Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line object:
• A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line
segment.
• A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line
segment.
• Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option and edit
the numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop-down
arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in
the Distance and Bearing/Angle option.
6. Click Done to finish your edit.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.
Editing a Track
Once you download a track from a GPS receiver, you can edit (including reshaping or
changing line color or width), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
To Edit a Track
Use the following steps to edit a track.
1. Open the map file containing the draw file with the track you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file, click File and select the
draw file from the draw file dialog area. Then, click Done.
4. Click the Select tool and click the track you want to edit.
• A box displays around the selected track.
• The shape points used to create the line display as small, magenta squares.
5. Change any of the track style, color, or weight options of the existing track.
• To edit any label on a track, click the Select tool, select the line twice, then
type the label in the text box that displays next to the track.
• Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line:
• A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected track
segment.
• A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected track
segment.
• Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option and edit
their numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
6. Click Done to finish your edit.
OR
151

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.
Placing a Routable Road, Line, Arc, or Spline at a Specific
Location
You can place any line object (routable road, line, arc, or spline) at a specific coordinate
location.
To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location
Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To place a routable road, click the Routable Road tool .
OR
To place a line/arc/spline, click and hold the Line/Arc/Spline tool
and
select the tool you want. Then, select the line, style, width (if available), and color
for your line/arc/spline.
3. Select the Coordinate option, or use the Distance and Bearing/Angle option in
conjunction with the Coordinate option, and enter the appropriate coordinates or
numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box.
Note If you are placing an arc, enter new numbers into the Distance and
Bearing/Angle text boxes for the two base points of the arc only. When the central
shape point of the arc is selected, the text options change from Distance and
Bearing/Angle to Radius and Direction. Enter the appropriate radius number and
direction to change the radius for this point.
4. Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point.
The line object displays on the map at those coordinates, distance, and bearing or
angle.
OR
After placing the first point coordinate, move your pointer to the map screen and
place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen.
5. To place additional points, lines, or other draw objects on the map in reference to the
first line, enter a specific distance and bearing into the corresponding text boxes and
click Apply.
Joining and Breaking Linear Objects
You can join two or more routable roads, tracks, lines, arcs, or splines into a single entity.
You can also break routable roads, tracks, lines, or splines. You cannot break arcs.
To Join
Use the following steps to join linear objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool , press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and select
any lines, arcs, or splines you want to join.
OR
Click the Select tool and drag a box around the linear objects you want to join.
Note When joining the preceding types of line objects, you can mix and match lines,
152

Using the Draw Tools
arcs, and splines. The result is always a line. However, when you join multiple
splines, the resulting joined object is a spline.
3. Right-click, point to Manage Draw, and then click Join Lines.
OR
Join the lines by pressing CTRL+J or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned
for the joining function.
The selected lines are joined.
Note Any other objects selected during the multi-select process are ignored.
To Break
Use the following steps to break linear objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool and select the line object you want to break.
• A box displays around the active line.
• The shape points used to create the line display as small, magenta squares.
3. Click the shape point where you want to break the line, right-click, point to Manage
Draw, and then click Break Line.
OR
Break the line by pressing CTRL+B or the keyboard shortcut combination you
assigned for the breaking function.
The line is broken into two segments at the designated point and you can edit each
line separately.
Note It is important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively. If you pan the
map, use another tab, and so on between steps, you may need to repeat the steps
again to break your linear object.
Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons
Drawing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map
You can add area objects (circles, rectangles, and polygons) to a draw file in your current
map file. Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects.
• Use circles to designate circular map features.
• Use rectangles to designate land boundaries or any other rectangular map feature.
• Use polygons to designate water bodies, land boundaries, or any other irregular
map feature.
Once you have created an area draw object, you can edit (including reshaping or changing
line color or weight), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
Note The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the circle, rectangle, and
polygon tools in the Draw tab. When you draw an area object on the map, the area displays
next to the object on the map. If you click off of the object, you can view the area again by
clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map.
To Draw a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Use the following steps to add circles, rectangles, or polygons to the map.
1. Click the Draw tab.
153

Street Atlas USA User Guide
2. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool to view its hidden
options. Select the tool you want.
3. From the Fill drop-down list, select the fill style you want to apply to the area object.
4. Click the Fill Color button to the right of the Fill drop-down list to select the color
for your fill style.
5. Select an outline style for your circle from the Outline drop-down list.
6. Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your area object.
7. Select the width for your area object outline from the Width drop-down list.
8. Select the Show Measurement check box to display area (and radius information
for circles) on the map as you draw the object.
9. To draw a circle, click the location for the circle's center on the map and drag away
from center to set the radius for the circle. Release as soon as you achieve the radius
you want. The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle's center display in
the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area.
OR
To draw a rectangle, click the location for the rectangle's upper-left corner on the
map and drag away from the corner to set the width, height, and area for the
rectangle. Release as soon as you achieve the size you want. The coordinates of the
upper-left corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill
options. The distance and bearing/angle of the final corner point from the first corner
point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options.
OR
To draw a polygon, click the map to enter each point of the polygon. The
coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the
fill options. The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous point
display in the corresponding text boxes. Labels display when end points are clicked if
the Show Measurement check box is selected.
10. Click the Select tool and then click the area object on the map.
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
11. Click the object again. A text box displays. Type the label in the text box and press
the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Editing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Once you have created an area draw object, you can edit (including reshaping or changing
line color or weight), copy, move, or delete at any time.
To Edit a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Use the following steps to edit an area draw object.
1. Open the map file containing the draw file with the area object you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the object you want to edit is not in the active draw file, click File and select the
draw file from the draw file dialog area. Then, click Done. The Draw dialog area
displays.
4. Click the Select tool and then click the object on the map.
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
OR
154

Using the Draw Tools
To edit multiple objects, click the Select tool
objects that you want to edit.
and then drag a box around the
5. Change the object's fill, outline, and/or width option.
OR
If you selected a single circle, drag one of the magenta squares around the circle to
change the circle's size. The center of the circle remains in its original location.
OR
If you selected a single rectangle, click one of the corner points of the rectangle and
drag to change its width, height, and area on the map.
OR
If you selected a single polygon, click one of the shape points of the polygon and
drag to change its bearing or angle, the leg length, and polygon area on the map.
Reshape the polygon by dragging any of the points in the polygon to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active polygon, a small
green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment and a small red
circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment. Select the
Coordinate option or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option and edit their
numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
Notes You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop-down arrow
next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and
Bearing/Angle option. You can also delete points and line segments from or add
points to a polygon.
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to finish your edit.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.
Placing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map
You can place any area object (circle, rectangle, or polygon) at a specific coordinate
location.
To Place an Area Object on the Map
Use the following steps to place a circle, rectangle, or polygon on the map.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool and select the tool
you want.
3. Select the circle fill, outline, and/or width options.
4. To place a circle on the map, enter the coordinates for the circle's center into the
corresponding text boxes. Then, enter the radius for the circle into the radius text
box.
OR
To place a rectangle on the map, select the Coordinate option or use the Distance
and Bearing/Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option. Enter the
appropriate coordinates or numbers for the rectangle's upper-left corner point into
the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box.
OR
To place a polygon on the map, select the Coordinate option or use the Distance
and Bearing/Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option, and enter
the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the first polygon point into the
corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box.
155

Street Atlas USA User Guide
5. Click Apply.
Note If you are placing a polygon on the map, repeat the procedure for the other
points.
Waypoints, Symbols, MapNotes, Text Labels, and Images
Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or
Image to the Map
You can add point draw objects to a draw file in your current map file. Point objects consist
of one anchor point attached to a waypoint, symbol, MapNote, image, or text label. The
anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic
coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed.
• Use the Waypoint tool to label waypoints on a map. You can exchange waypoints
with a GPS receiver.
• Use the Symbol tool to identify certain areas on the map such as houses,
monuments, or points of interest.
• Use the MapNote tool to point to and label a specific area on the map. See Map
Notes for more information.
• Use text labels to name features or give details about features on the map.
• Use the Image tool to add, edit, or place .bmp, .jpg, and .gif images on the map.
To Add a Point Object to the Map
Street Atlas USA Plus
• Add a MapNote, text label, or symbol
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text/Label/Symbol/Image tool and select
the tool you want. Then, select the font, style, size, and color for your point
object's label from the text style options.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button and browse to the document you
want to link your point object to. Then, click the file name and click Open.
The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Notes
These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes. To show/delete Route MapNotes,
see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
You can also add a MapNote by right-clicking the map on the point you want to label,
pointing to Add MapNote, and then selecting a MapNote option.
• Add a waypoint
From the Draw tab:
156

Using the Draw Tools
1. Click and hold the Tracks/Waypoints tool and select Waypoint . Then,
select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options. You can also select a
different font, style, size, and color for the waypoint name.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button and browse to the document you
want to link your point object to. Then, click the file name and click Open.
The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
• Add an image
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool and select
Image . Under Images, select an existing image, or click Add, browse to
an image, and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection.
Note To delete an image from the Images selection, select the image and
then click Delete.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button and browse to the document you
want to hyperlink your point object to. The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Regular Street Atlas USA
• Add a MapNote, text label, or symbol
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text/Label/Symbol/Image tool and select
the tool you want. Then, select the font, style, size, and color for your point
object's label from the text style options.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The Label text box opens.
3. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
4. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Notes
These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes. To show/delete Route MapNotes,
see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
157

Street Atlas USA User Guide
You can also add a MapNote by right-clicking the map on the point you want to label,
pointing to Add MapNote, and then selecting a MapNote option.
• Add a waypoint
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the Tracks/Waypoints tool and select Waypoint . Then,
select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options. You can also select a
different font, style, size, and color for the waypoint name.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The Label text box opens.
3. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
4. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
• Add an image
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool and select
Image . Under Images, select an existing image, or click Add, browse to
an image, and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection.
Note To delete an image from the Images selection, select the image and
then click Delete.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The Label text box opens.
3. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or distance and
bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the corresponding
Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text boxes.
4. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Tip Search for a point object by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find
tab or by typing the label name in the Start, Finish, Stop, or Via text boxes when creating
a route in the Route tab.
Editing a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or
Image
Once you add a point object to a draw file, you can edit (name only), copy, move, or delete
it at any time. You can edit multiple point objects at the same time by dragging a box
around the objects you want to edit. Any changes are made to all of the point objects
included in the box.
To Edit a Point Object
Use the following steps to edit a waypoint, symbol, MapNote, text label, or image.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool and then click the point object on the map twice.
3. Type a new name or phrase in the Label field, change the name's font, style, size, or
color; select a new symbol; or click the Hyperlink button to change the URL
158

Using the Draw Tools
address.
Note The Hyperlink button is available only in Street Atlas USA Plus.
4. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the point object's
active area when you are finished.
Placing a Waypoint, Symbol, Text Label, or Image at a
Specific Location
You can place any point object (waypoint, symbol, text label, or image) at a specific
coordinate location.
To Place a Point Object at a Specific Location
Use the following steps to place a waypoint, symbol, text label, or image at a specific
coordinate location.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To place a waypoint, click and hold the Track/Waypoint tool and select the
Waypoint tool . Select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options. You can
also select a different font, style, size and color for the waypoint name.
OR
To place a symbol, click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool
and select the Symbol tool . Select the symbol from the
Symbol Selection list. You can also select a different font, style, size and color for
the symbol name.
OR
To place a text label, click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool
and select the Text Label tool . Select the font, style, size, and color from the
text style options. A sample of how your text display appears to the left of the
options.
OR
To place an image, click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Image tool . Under Images, select an
existing image or click Add, browse to an image, and click Open to add a new image
to your Images selection.
3. Select the Coordinate option, or use the Distance and Bearing/Angle option in
conjunction with the Coordinate option, and type the appropriate coordinates or
numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box.
4. Click Apply. The point object displays on the map at those coordinates, distance,
and bearing or angle.
5. If you are placing a text label, enter the text and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard or click the map outside of the text label active area when you are finished.
Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes
You can add your own MapNotes to a map. MapNotes have a white background that make
them highly visible on the map. They can contain multiple lines of text and can be moved
off of the labeled area without losing their visual links with the points. You can use
MapNotes for directions or explanations.
Notes
159

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• This Help topic describes the steps necessary to move and delete Draw MapNotes. To
show/delete Route MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
• When you use right-click functionality to add a MapNote, it is light blue unless it is a
blank MapNote.
• You can search for a MapNote by its label name using the QuickSearch function in
the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start, Finish, Stop, or Via text
boxes when creating a route in the Route tab.
To Move a MapNote
Use the following steps to move a MapNote.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool .
3. Click the MapNote to select it.
The MapNote is enclosed with a box.
4. You can:
• Drag the stem to a new location to move the MapNote.
• Drag the text box to a new location, leaving the anchor point in the same
location on the map.
• Drag the anchor point to a new location, leaving the text box in the same
location on the map.
To Delete a MapNote
Use the following steps to delete a MapNote.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool .
3. Click the MapNote to select it.
4. Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
Custom Symbols
Custom Symbols Overview
DeLorme XSym lets you create and edit your own symbols, which you can edit and add to
maps within DeLorme mapping programs. The symbols created are 24 x 24 pixels. New and
edited symbols are saved within a symbol set (.dim file) and can contain up to 250 symbols.
Symbol set files are located at C:\DeLorme Docs\Symbols.
The DeLorme XSym Dialog Box
160

Using the Draw Tools
The XSym dialog box provides all the tools you need to create and edit symbols for your
DeLorme mapping program. Click an area on the diagram below to view information on the
various parts of the dialog box.
Tip To close the pop-up information box that displays when you click the diagram, click
outside the image or click another part of the image.
Creating a New Symbol
With DeLorme XSym you can add a new symbol to an existing or new symbol set (.dim) file.
You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in
the DeLorme mapping program.
To Create a New Symbol
Use the following steps to create a new symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set you want to add your new symbol to from the
drop-down list OR select New to create a new symbol set.
4. Under Symbols, click Edit to display the DeLorme XSym dialog box.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
161

Street Atlas USA User Guide
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and the tools under Transparency and Anchor to
create the new symbol.
• To undo the last action, click the Undo button under Edit Symbol.
• To repeat the last action, click the Redo button under Edit Symbol.
7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once a name is assigned to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence of that
symbol placed on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default
symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
• As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
• See also: Importing a Bitmap, Copying and Pasting, Pasting a Bitmap into XSym,
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym
GPS Device Custom Symbols
You can create a custom symbol set that includes all of the waypoint symbols on your thirdparty
GPS device. By creating this custom symbol set, the waypoints you create display the
same in both the mapping application and on your third-party GPS device, no matter where
they originated.
Third-party GPS waypoint symbols are identified by their waypoint ID number, which is
assigned by the device's manufacturer. To successfully view third-party GPS waypoint
symbols in the mapping application, you must assign the proper waypoint identification
number to each symbol you add to the custom symbol set.
Important To create a custom symbol set of your third-party GPS device's waypoint
symbols, you must contact the device's manufacturer to obtain the graphic files and the
waypoint ID number associated with each symbol.
To Assign a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol
Use the following steps to assign a waypoint ID to a custom symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Waypoint/Track tool to view its hidden options. Select
the Waypoint tool .
3. Create a new symbol set.
4. Paste the third-party GPS device's waypoint symbol into XSym.
5. Use the transparency option to make the area behind the symbol transparent.
6. Type the waypoint identification number for the symbol in the Waypoint ID text
box.
7. For each additional symbol, click New and then repeat steps 4–7.
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
• Waypoint ID numbers vary by manufacturer and model.
162

Using the Draw Tools
• If you import multiple waypoints from a third-party GPS device without assigning a
waypoint ID to each first, all of the waypoints display in the mapping application with a
single default symbol.
• If you do not know the identification number for a third-party GPS device's waypoint,
import the waypoint file into the mapping application. Then, use one of the two
methods below to learn the waypoint ID:
o Open the symbol set that holds the waypoint and view the waypoint's ID number in
XSym.
o Click the Info tool on the toolbar and click the symbol on the map.
The waypoint ID displays in the Info tab.
Editing a Symbol
With DeLorme XSym, you can edit an existing symbol in a symbol set (.dim) file and save
the change or save it as a new symbol to be added to another symbol set. You can assign a
new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme
mapping program.
To Edit a Symbol
Use the following steps to edit a symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit. The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol you want to edit from the symbol selection of the default symbol
set or from another symbol set you have created. The symbol displays in the Symbol
Editing Grid.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
• To undo the last action, click the Undo button under Edit Symbol.
• To repeat the last action, click the Redo button under Edit Symbol.
7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence of that
symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default
symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Note
• As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
• See also: Importing a Bitmap, Copying and Pasting, Pasting a Bitmap into XSym,
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym
163

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Finding a Custom Symbol
The symbol name you assign to a symbol in XSym is different than the label you attach to
the symbol on the map using the symbol draw tool. You can use the symbol name to help
locate a custom symbol you have already placed on a map using the Advanced feature
under the Find tab.
To Find a Custom Symbol
Use the following steps to find a symbol by its symbol name.
1. Click the Find tab and then click Advanced.
2. Select Category from the Find drop-down list
3. Select the applicable option from the Within drop-down list.
4. Type the symbol name in the Keywords text box.
5. Click Search.
6. Click OK.
The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box.
The Symbol Name displays in the Map Feature Type column just before the symbol's
feature type (draw object).
7. Double-click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on
the map.
The map view centers on the item. If you assigned a name for the symbol under the
Draw tab, a MapTag displays the name at the symbol location.
If you did not assign a name for the symbol, a MapTag displays the Symbol Name at
the symbol location.
Notes
• If you do not assign a symbol name to a symbol in XSym, you can locate it with the
generic keyword of "symbol" or by the name or phrase given the symbol in the Draw
tab. For more information, see Finding a Symbol by its Name.
• If you assigned a Symbol Name to a custom symbol in XSym and placed the symbol
on the map, the Symbol Name displays in the demographic information area when
you right-click the symbol and select Info.
Importing a Bitmap
You can import a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol, but any bitmap you
import must be 24 x 24 pixels or less. You can assign a new category name for the symbol
to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Import a Bitmap
Use the following steps to import a bitmap to use as a symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
164

Using the Draw Tools
5. Click Import to display the Open Bitmap File dialog box. Browse to the location of
the bitmap and click Open.
The imported bitmap displays in the Symbol Editing Grid. See important Notes
below.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
• To undo the last action, click the Undo button under Edit Symbol.
• To repeat the last action, click the Redo button under Edit Symbol.
7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence of that
symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default
symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
• If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a message
box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is
reduced.
• If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the edge of
the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.
• As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
Copying and Pasting
You can copy and paste portions of a symbol or whole symbols to create new symbols or
edit existing ones.
To Copy and Paste in XSym
Use the following steps to copy a symbol or portions of a symbol to edit an existing symbol
or to create a new symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, select a symbol from the symbol selection.
6. In the Draw Tool Box, click the Select tool.
7. Select the area of the symbol you want to copy or select the whole symbol, and then
click the Copy button
under Edit Symbol.
8. Click the Paste button under Edit Symbol. The copied image is pasted into the
current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid. Drag the pasted piece into the place you
want it within the current symbol.
165

Street Atlas USA User Guide
OR
To create a new symbol with the copied image, click New under Symbols in Set to
clear the Symbol Editing Grid, and then click the Paste button to add the pasted
image into the grid.
Note You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the
Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program. To assign a symbol name to the current
symbol, type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
9. Click OK when finished.
Notes
• To undo an action, click the Undo button under Edit Symbol.
• To repeat an action, click the Redo button under Edit Symbol.
Pasting a Bitmap into XSym
You can copy a bitmap or part of a bitmap to the clipboard and paste the image into
DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol. Ideally, the pasted bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in
size. You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab
in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Paste a Bitmap into XSym
Use the following steps to paste a bitmap into XSym.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Open a bitmap in another image editing program, and select the bitmap or a part of
the bitmap you want to copy. Press CTRL+C on your keyboard to copy the selection
to the clipboard.
7. Click the Paste button under Edit Symbol.
The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid. See
important Notes below.
8. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
• To undo the last action, click the Undo button under Edit Symbol.
• To repeat the last action, click the Redo button under Edit Symbol.
9. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
10. Click OK when finished.
Notes
• If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a message
box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is
reduced.
166

Using the Draw Tools
• If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the edge of
the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.
• As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym
You can drag a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol. Using drag to bring in an
image is much like importing a bitmap into XSym. Ideally, the new bitmap should be 24 x
24 pixels in size. You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under
the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Drag a Bitmap into XSym
Use the following steps to drag a bitmap into XSym.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Browse your computer to locate the bitmap (.bmp) file.
7. Drag the file into XSym.
The bitmap image displays in the Symbol Editing Grid. See important Notes below.
8. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the
symbol.
• To undo the last action, click the Undo button under Edit Symbol.
• To repeat the last action, click the Redo button under Edit Symbol.
9. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
10. Click OK when finished.
Notes
• If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a message
box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is
reduced.
• If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the edge of
the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.
• As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the Symbol
Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the
Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view.
Removing a Symbol
You can remove a symbol from the default symbol set or from any other symbol set you
have created.
To Remove a Symbol
167

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to remove a symbol from a symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol to remove from the symbol selection.
The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Click Remove.
The symbol disappears from the symbol selection under Symbols in Set and the
next symbol within the selection displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
7. Click OK when finished.
Symbol Editing Tools
Draw Tool Box
DeLorme XSym has a Draw Tool Box that lets you create and edit symbols within the
Symbol Editing Grid independently of the DeLorme mapping program. The tools provided
help you to create unique symbols to add to your map.
The following are the tools available in the Draw Tool Box.
Pencil—Draw freehand lines within the grid.
Line—Draw lines by clicking and dragging to the end point you want within the
grid.
Ellipse—Create an ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or
shape of the ellipse you want.
Filled Ellipse—Create a filled ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve
the size or shape of the filled ellipse you want.
Rectangle—Create a rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the
size of the rectangle you want.
Filled Rectangle—Create a filled rectangle by clicking and dragging until you
achieve the size of the filled rectangle you want.
Fill—Use the fill tool to fill an area of the grid with a color chosen from the color
palette.
Select—Use select to choose an area of the symbol to copy from the Symbol
Editing Grid and then paste into the same symbol or another symbol in the grid.
Using the Transparency Option
The transparency option in DeLorme XSym lets you display a selected color as transparent
in the final symbol image you place on a map within a DeLorme mapping program. For
168

Using the Draw Tools
example, you may want to view the symbol object without the square of the surrounding
background color. You would then select the background color to appear transparent.
To Make Part of a Symbol Transparent
Use the following steps to make part a symbol transparent.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol you want to edit from the Symbol Selection.
The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Select the Transparent option under Transparency.
7. Click the Select Color tool .
The pointer changes to a dropper tool.
8. Select the color on the symbol you want to appear transparent.
The Transparent Color display box updates with the selected color, and the Image
Preview displays the chosen color area as transparent.
9. To display all colors, select the Opaque option under Transparency.
The Image Preview reflects this change.
10. Click OK when finished.
Note Be sure the color in the symbol you want to appear transparent is not repeated in
another part of the symbol you want to display as opaque. Select a new color from the color
palette and fill the area on the symbol you want to display as transparent with the new
color. Use the Select Color tool to select the new color in the symbol grid.
Anchor Position
Being aware of Cursor Position is important for choosing the anchor position of a symbol.
The anchor is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic
coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed. Any newly created
symbol, whether imported, pasted or dragged into the XSym Symbol Editing Grid, has a
default position of center anchor.
XSym lets you change the anchor position of your symbol.
To Select the Anchor Position
Use the following steps to select the anchor position of a symbol.
1. Once your symbol is created, click the Anchor Position button.
When you pass your pointer over the Symbol Editing Grid, it changes to a small cross
hair (plus sign).
2. Click the pixel grid within the symbol to position your anchor.
The anchor location pixel coordinate numbers display after the position text to the
right of the Anchor Position button. The large cross hair in the Symbol Editing Grid
moves from its default anchor position to the new anchor position.
169

Street Atlas USA User Guide
To Center the Anchor Position
Click Center Anchor to place the anchor point in the exact center of the Symbol Editing
Grid.
Cursor Position
Any symbol created in XSym is 24 x 24 pixels square. Each of these pixels is represented in
the Symbol Editing Grid. When you move your cursor over the Symbol Editing Grid, the
cursor position by pixel number displays to the right of the Cursor Position text next to the
Image Preview (as shown below).
Image Preview and Cursor Position
As you move the cursor over the grid, the numbers update according to where you are in
the 24 x 24 grid. The first number in the above sample, 16, refers to the number of pixels
across (the X coordinate) from the upper left corner of the grid, beginning with zero. The
second number, 14, refers to the number of pixels down (the Y coordinate) from the upperleft
corner of the grid, beginning with zero.
Symbol Sets
Creating a New Symbol Set
Symbols created in DeLorme XSym are saved within a symbol set (.dim file) which can
contain up to 250 symbols.
To Create a New Symbol Set
Use the following steps to create a new symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select [New...] from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbol Set Name, type the name for your new symbol set. The default
name for the new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet.
5. Import a bitmap into your new symbol set.
OR
Create a new symbol to add to your new symbol set.
To Create a New Symbol Set from an Existing Symbol Set
You can make a copy of an existing symbol set and save it as a custom symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set you want to copy from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
170

Using the Draw Tools
4. Under Symbol Set Name, type the name for your new symbol set.
You can edit symbols, create symbols, or import bitmaps for your new symbol set.
Opening a Symbol Set
Open an existing symbol set (.dim) to add new symbols or edit existing ones.
To Open a Symbol Set
Use the following steps to open a symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool to
view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool .
3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens. The symbol selection for the new symbol set
displays under Symbols in Set and the Symbol Editing Grid displays the first symbol
of the new symbol set.
171

Routing
Creating a Route
You can create a road route using the Route tab, right-click feature, or the toolbar. Once
you create a route, you can use the Route tab to view route directions, edit a route, and
display routes on a map.
Routes are calculated using the default routing preferences. To show/remove routing
MapNotes, waypoint labels, state borders, and route vias, enable/disable GPS voice
navigation, or to change the default speed, road type, or routing preference, see Setting
Your Routing Preferences.
Tip If you are using a GPS with NavMode, use the E-Z Nav route wizard to quickly
calculate a route to a single destination.
To Create a Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to create a route.
1. Click the Route tab and then click New/Edit (if it is not already selected).
2. Click File, click New, and then type the name for your route in the Name text box.
3. Click the Start tool and then click the point on the map where you want to begin
your route.
OR
To use an address book entry as your start location, select Start From Address
Book from the Start drop-down list, click to select an Address Book entry, and then
click OK.
OR
To use your current GPS position as your start location, select Start From GPS
Location from the Start drop-down list.
OR
Type your start location in the Start drop-down text box. You can type the name of
an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
Notes
An address must be in one of the following formats: street address, city, state OR
street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab) must be
selected to search for address book contact names.
4. Optional. Add or insert stops or vias.
5. Click the Finish tool and then click the spot on the map where you want to end
your route.
OR
To use an address book entry as your finish location, select Finish From Address
Book from the Finish drop-down list, click to select an Address Book entry, and
then click OK.
OR
Type your finish location in the Finish drop-down text box. You can type in the name
of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
Notes
An address must be in one of the following formats: street address, city, state OR
street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
173

Street Atlas USA User Guide
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab) must be
selected to search for address book contact names.
6. Select a calculation method — the program adjusts the default calculation values
based on your selection:
Driving–Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle.
Cycling–Use this method to calculate a bicycle route.
Walking/running–Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot.
7. Select a route type (Road-Shortest or Road-Quickest) from the drop-down list.
8. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate.
If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a dialog
box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search results
until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then click
OK.
9. Click Directions to view the route directions.
AND/OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
AND/OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Create a Route Using the Right-click Function
Use the following steps to create a route.
1. Right-click the map location where you want to begin your route, point to Create
Route, and click Set as Start.
2. Optional. Add or insert stops or vias.
3. Right-click the map location where you want to end your route, point to Create
Route, and click Set as Finish.
4. If the route doesn't automatically calculate, right-click the route, point to Manage
Route, and click Calculate Road Quickest or Calculate Road Shortest.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search
results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then
click OK.
5. Optional. Click the Route tab. Then click the Directions subtab to view the route
directions, the Advanced subtab to display advanced routing options, Plan Trip to
assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route, or Back on Track to add your
current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Create a Route Using the Toolbar
Click here to view the steps for creating a route using the toolbar.
Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias
Use stops and vias to route you through a particular place or along a particular road. You
can add or insert stops or vias in any route you create using the Route tab, the route
options on the toolbar, or by right-clicking the map (2-D only).
• A stop is a location along a route where you want to stop and then proceed from.
• A via is a point on the map that you want your route to go through.
• Add stops or vias to follow a route in a particular order.
174

Routing
Tips
• Insert stops or vias to arrange them geographically in the route.
• Turn off Auto Calculate when you are adding many stops and vias.
• Use Add instead of Insert when your start and finish are at the same place.
• Don't place the finish point until you add all your stops and vias.
• Place vias near the beginning of the road you want to use.
• When you calculate the route, if it goes to a via and then returns to the original path,
insert another via toward the end of that road (where you want to turn onto the next
road) to force it to use that road.
• When using a road as a stop or via, zoom in to ensure you select the correct road.
The selected road segment is highlighted when you click it.
To Add a Stop or Via To Your Route
The Add Stop/Via function adds stops and vias in the order you add them to the route. Use
the following steps to add a stop or via to your route.
1. Create a route.
2. In the New/Edit dialog area in the Route tab, make sure the button next to the
Stop tool (if you are adding a stop) or the Via tool (if you are adding a via) is
labeled Add. If it is not, click the arrow next to the button and select Add.
3. To add a stop or via to the route, click the Stop or Via tool and then click the
location on the map.
OR
• To use an address book entry as your stop or via location
1. Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop-down list.
2. Select an Address Book entry, and then click OK.
• To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location
Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop-down list.
• Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box
Type the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
If you type an address, it must be in one of the following formats: street
address, city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab)
must be selected to search for address book contact names.
• Right-click the map to add a last stop or via
1. Right-click the map where you want to add the last stop or via.
2. Point to Create Route, and then click Add as Last Stop or Add as
Last Via.
• Use the toolbar to add a stop or via.
2. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate to recalculate your route to
include the stop or via.
OR
Click the Calculate button
on the toolbar.
175

Street Atlas USA User Guide
OR
If the Auto check box is not selected, right-click the route, point to Manage Route,
and click Calculate Road Quickest, or Calculate Road Shortest.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search
results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then
click OK.
3. Click Directions to view the route directions.
OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
OR
Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route.
OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.
To Insert a Stop or Via Into Your Route
The Insert Stop/Via function arranges stops/vias geographically in the route. Use the
following steps to insert a stop or via to your route.
1. Create a route.
2. In the New/Edit dialog area in the Route tab, make sure the button next to the
Stop tool (if you are adding a stop) or the Via tool (if you are adding a via) is
labeled Insert. If it is not, click the arrow next to the button and select Insert.
3. To insert a stop or via to the route, click the Stop or Via tool and then click the
location on the map.
OR
• To use an address book entry as your stop or via location
1. Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop-down list.
2. Select an Address Book entry, and then click OK.
• To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location
Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop-down list.
• Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box
Type the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
If you type an address, it must be in one of the following formats: street
address, city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab)
must be selected to search for address book contact names.
• Right-click the map where you want to insert the stop or via
1. Right-click the map where you want to insert the stop or via.
2. Point to Create Route, and then click Insert Stop or Insert Via.
• Use the toolbar to insert a stop or via.
3. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate to recalculate your route to
include the stop or via.
OR
Click the Calculate button
on the toolbar.
176

Routing
OR
If the Auto check box is not selected, right-click the route, point to Manage Route,
and click Calculate Road Quickest, or Calculate Road Shortest.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of search
results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to select it, and then
click OK.
4. Click Directions to view the route directions.
OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
OR
Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route.
OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a via to the current route.
Changing the Routing Method
You can change your routing calculation method at any time. You may need to do this to
update your routing preferences.
To Change the Route Calculation Method
1. From the Route tab, click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Select a calculation method:
Driving–Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle.
Cycling–Use this method to calculate a bicycle route.
Walking/running–Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot.
3. Select a route type (Road-Shortest or Road-Quickest) from the drop-down list.
Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route
You can change the properties of a stop along your route by using the Stop Prefs function in
the Advanced sub-tab under Route.
To Change the Properties of a Stop
Use the following steps to change the properties of a stop.
1. Click the Route tab and then click Advanced.
2. Click a stop from the waypoint list and then click Stop Prefs.
The Stop Time Preferences dialog box opens.
3. To designate the stop as an end of day stop, select the End of Day check box, click
Apply, and then click Done.
OR
To designate the stop as a fuel break, select the Fuel check box, click Apply, select
the Duration check box, select the duration of the fuel break using the Hrs and Mins
drop-down lists, and then click Done.
Note It is not necessary to allocate a fuel stop duration.
Viewing Route Directions
After you create a route, you can view the accompanying route directions.
To View the Route Directions
177

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to view the route directions.
1. Click the Route tab and then click Directions to open the Route Directions dialog
area.
The list of routes you have created display in the route list on the left. A selected
check box indicates the route is displaying on the map.
2. Click a route to select and highlight it.
OR
Double-click a route to center it on the map.
3. The route directions for the selected route display in the right window. Adjust the
size of the tab area to expand the view.
Tip Click the header of a column to open a menu from which you can select the type
of information you want to display in each column.
4. Click a leg to select it and then click Go To to center the map on the leg.
OR
Double-click a leg to center the map on the leg.
Tip When tracking with a GPS receiver, select the GPS Track check box to follow along
with the route directions in real time as you travel. Click Show Turns to display the current
distance and time to your finish.
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing
If you know you will be travelling in an area that is under construction or is a highlypopulated
area with a lot of traffic congestion, you can draw a circle/rectangle/polygon over
that area to avoid it when you calculate your route. You can create multiple regions to
avoid.
To Avoid a Specified Area When Routing
Use the following steps to designate an area to avoid when calculating your route.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area.
3. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool to view its hidden
options. Select the tool you want to use.
4. Optional. Select one or more of the following:
• From the Fill drop-down list, select the fill style you want to apply to the draw
object.
• Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop-down list to select the
color for your fill style.
• Select an outline style for your draw object from the Outline drop-down list.
• Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your draw
object.
• Select the width for your draw object outline from the Width drop-down list.
• Select the Show Measurement check box to display measurement
information for your draw object as your draw it on the map.
5. If you selected the Circle tool, click the location for the circle's center on the map
and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle. Release as soon as you
achieve the radius you want.
The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle's center display in the
corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area.
178

Routing
OR
If you selected the Polygon tool, click the map to enter each point of the polygon.
OR
If you selected the Rectangle tool, click the location for the rectangle's upper-left
corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width, height, and area
for the rectangle. Release as soon as you achieve the size you want.
6. Right-click the draw object, point to Manage Draw, and click Route Avoid. If the
object has no name, it the name "Route Avoid" is visible on the map.
7. If you do not have the Auto Calculate option selected in the Route tab, click the
Route tab and then click Calculate to recalculate your route.
Note To undo your route avoid, right-click it on the map, point to Manage Draw, and click
Route Avoid to clear the check box. To delete the route avoid from the map, click the
Select tool in the Draw tab and click the draw object on the map. Then, press the DELETE
key on your keyboard.
Saving Route Directions as Text
You can save your directions and along the way results as a text file.
To Save Your Route Directions
Use the following steps to save your directions.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab.
If you do not have a route in this map file, the Route Options are unavailable.
2. Select the route you want to save from the Name drop-down list.
If the route you want to save is not available in the Name drop-down list, you may
not have the correct map file open.
3. Under Options, select Directions or Along the Way.
4. Click the Save button on the Route tab.
5. To rename the .txt file, type the new name in the File Name text box and click
Save.
Setting Your Routing Preferences
Once you master basic routing, you can customize your routing preferences and create
more advanced routes.
• The routing preferences allow you to favor or avoid various road types when
calculating your route. You can also set your speed preferences.
• The default settings are based on the calculation method you chose when creating
the route.
• To change your route calculation method, see Changing the Routing Methods.
To Set Your Routing Preferences
Use the following steps to set your routing preferences.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area.
3. From the Road Type drop-down list, select the road type for which to set
preferences.
4. Select Preferred, Standard, or Avoid from the Routing Preference drop-down
list.
179

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Preferred favors this type of road whenever possible, Standard is the default level,
and Avoid avoids this type of road whenever possible. An avoided road may be used
when no other road is available.
5. In the Speed text box, type your average driving speed for this road type.
These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route.
6. In the Urban Speed text box, type your average driving speed within an urban
area.
These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route.
7. Repeat these steps for each road type.
8. When you are finished setting your road preferences, click Review to display your
settings.
9. In the Route Features list, select the check box for each feature you want to
display:
• Show Location MapNotes–Displays Location MapNotes with their coordinate
information for each point in your route.
• Show Comments MapNotes–Displays comments about your route.
• Show Summary MapNotes–Displays time and distance information for each
waypoint and the finish point of your route.
• Display Waypoint Labels–Displays start/stop/via/finish labels on the map
when the route is created.
• Include State Borders–Shows or hides state borders in your route
directions (only available when Road is the selected route type).
• GPS Voice Navigation–Provides spoken route directions when you are
tracking with a GPS receiver. After initializing, the computer speaks the
directions for the next turn in your route. It repeats the instructions
approximately 90 seconds prior to arriving at the turn.
• Display Route Vias—Shows or hides your route vias on the map.
10. Click Done.
Note Click Use Defaults to restore all route preferences to the default settings.
Editing a Route
You can modify existing routes by:
• Adding, removing, and rearranging stops and vias.
• Adjusting your route preferences based on road type.
• Customizing your route based on your driving style and speed.
• Reversing a route.
Tips
• Zoom in to set accurate points for your route.
• Use the right-click option for routing. Just right-click the route, stop, or via, point to
Manage Route, and click the applicable option.
To Edit a Route
To edit a route, click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab. Select the route
from the Name drop-down list box. The route becomes active. The following list describes
the edit functions.
180

Routing
• Street Atlas USA Plus and regular Street Atlas USA with advanced file
management only: To change the route name, select the name in the Name text
box, type the new route name, and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
• To change a route point, click the corresponding tool and then click the new spot on
the map.
OR
Select a route point on the map and drag it to the new location on the map.
Note If you try to add a start or finish point to an existing route, the "Would you
like to move your Start location or create a New route?" message opens. Click New
to begin creating a new route. Click Move to move the Start or Finish point to the
last location clicked.
• To add or insert a stop or via to your route, click the corresponding tool and then
click the spot on the map where you want to add or insert your stop or via. For more
information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
• To rearrange stops and vias, click the point to select it and then click the Move Up
or Move Down tools to relocate it in the route.
• To delete a stop or via, select the stop or via in the route list and then click the
Delete button.
• To change a stop to a via, select the stop and click Make Via. To change a via to a
stop, select the via and click Make Stop.
• Click Reverse Rte to reverse the order of all of the points in the route.
• Click Calculate if the Auto check box is not selected in the New/Edit subtab.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Editing Roads
You can change the characteristics of any road on a map to:
• Two Way
• One Way N or E
• No Left Turn N or E
• No Right Turn N or E
• No Way
• One Way S or W
• No Left Turn S or W
• No Right Turn S or W
To Edit a Road
181

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Use the following steps to edit a road.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Edit Roads.
3. Select the Display Road Edits check box to show existing road edits on the map.
4. Click the Select tool and select the road on the map you want to edit.
5. Select a direction.
• If you select Two Way, you can also select No Left Turn No Right Turn.
• If you select One Way, you can also select No Left Turn or No Right Turn.
• If you select No Way, you cannot select any other options.
Note Click Default to change the road properties to the default settings. Click
Clear All Edits to remove all road options and return all road properties to their
default settings.
6. Click Done.
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote
The easiest way to label your route points (start, stop, via, and finish) with a MapNote is to
use the Route Preferences section of the Route tab.
If you select more than one option, each category of information (location, comments,
and/or summary) displays in the same MapNote.
To Label a Route Point with a MapNote
Use the following steps to label a route point with a MapNote.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area.
3. Under Route Features, select the check box next to each MapNote you want to
display at your route points:
• Show Location MapNotes–Displays the coordinate information for each point in
your route.
• Show Comments MapNotes–Displays comments about each point of the route
as specified in the Route Advanced subtab.
To modify route comments, click the Route tab, click the Advanced subtab,
select the route, and then click in the Comments column twice (do not double
click) next to the route point you want to create a comment for. The information
you type in the Comments field for that point is placed in a Comments MapNote
when you selected to show it on the map.
• Show Summary MapNotes–Displays time and distance information for each
point in your route.
4. Click Done.
Moving Route MapNotes
You can move route MapNotes. The text box moves, but the point stays on the map
location.
To show/delete route MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
To move and delete draw Map Notes, see Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes.
To Move a Route MapNote
182

Routing
Use the following steps to move a MapNote.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click the Move Route MapNotes button .
3. Click the MapNote to select it.
4. Drag the text box to the new location.
Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map
All the routes you create are automatically displayed. The active route displays as a gold
line outlined in red. Each inactive route displays as a dashed, orange line outlined in green.
You can choose to display only certain routes without deleting them from the map.
To Display a Route on the Map
Use the following steps to display a hidden route on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. In the route list on the left, select the check box next to the route you want to
display.
OR
To center the map on the route, double-click the route name.
To Hide a Route on the Map
Use the following steps to hide a route from view on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. In the route list on the left, clear the check box next to each route you want to hide
from view on the map.
OR
Right-click the route you want to clear from the map view, point to Manage Route,
and then click Hide Route.
To Center the Map on a Route
Use the following steps to center a route on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. Double-click the route in the route list on the left.
Tip To center a route that is not in the current map view, click the Route tab, click the
New/Edit subtab, and select the route from the Name drop-down list.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Saving a Route
183

Street Atlas USA User Guide
The route in memory is retained as you create it. You are prompted to save your route
when you create a new map file or exit the program.
• Creating a new map file–When you click File/New in the Files dialog area on the Map
Files tab, you are asked if you want to save changes to the most recently used map
file. A separate dialog box asks if you want to save changes to an unsaved route.
• Exiting the application–The Save Changes dialog box asks if you want to save your
changes.
You can also save the route using the Route tab.
Routes have .anr extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\Navigation.
To Save a Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to save a route using the Route tab.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
3. Click File and then click Save.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Deleting a Route
You can permanently delete routes.
To Delete a Route
Use the following steps to delete a route.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Select the route from the Name drop-down list.
3. Click File and then click Delete.
OR
Right-click the route, point to Manage Route, and then click Delete Route.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
184

Routing
Importing Routes
Routes can be imported from many other DeLorme mapping programs using the Route tab.
To Import an Existing Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to import an existing route using the Route tab.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Click File and then click Import.
The Import dialog box opens.
3. Browse to select the route file and then click Open.
The map centers on the imported route and is available in the Name drop-down list.
Note for regular Street Atlas USA users
This Help topic describes functionality provided in advanced file management.
Advanced file management allows you to save multiple routes and draw layers in a
single map file. With simplified file management, you can save only one route
and/or draw layer in a single map file. If you did not select to enable advanced file
management during the product installation, you can still change the settings
using the Change File Management option in the Options menu. For more
information, see Activating Advanced/Simplified File Management.
This note does not apply to Street Atlas USA Plus users.
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences
You can schedule end of day and fuel breaks along a route by using the Plan Trip option in
the Route tab. You can schedule end of day breaks according to the miles (or other distance
unit selected in Map Display) or hours driven and you can schedule fuel breaks according to
your current fuel level, your vehicle's fuel consumption rate, and so on.
This feature works with the route preferences you have designated with the Route
Preferences option under Route. For more information, see Setting Your Routing
Preferences.
You can also estimate the fuel cost for your route.
To Set Your End of Day and Fuel Stop Preferences
Use the following steps to set your time preferences.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Route tab and then click Plan Trip.
• Select the Estimate End of Day Breaks check box to schedule end of day
breaks for your trip.
• Select Hours per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a
designated number of hours traveled per day. Then, type the number
of hours you want to travel per day in the Hours Per Day text box.
Use the Flexibility drop-down list to determine the amount of time
you want to be flexible between breaks and defined stops. For
example, if you selected 1.5 Hrs from the Flexibility drop-down list and
185

Street Atlas USA User Guide
have an end of day break within 1.5 hours of a planned stop, the end
of day break is moved to the planned stop.
OR
• Select mi per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a
designated number of miles traveled per day. Then, type the number of
miles you want to travel per day in the Mi Per Day text box. Use the
Flexibility drop-down list to determine the number of miles you want
to be flexible between breaks and defined stops. For example, if you
selected 50 mi from the Flexibility drop-down list and have an end of
day break within 50 miles of a planned stop, the end of day break is
moved to the planned stop.
Note the unit of measurement used is based on your units of
measurement setting.
• Select the Estimate Fuel Breaks check box to schedule fuel breaks for your
trip.
• Type the fuel tank capacity (in gallons) in the Tank Cap text box.
• Type the fuel consumption rate (in miles per gallon or the distance unit
you have selected in the Display tab of the Options dialog) for your
vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box.
• Select the amount closest to your current fuel tank level from the
Starting level drop-down list.
• Select the amount of fuel you would like to have in your tank when
warned to stop for fuel from the Warning Level drop-down list.
3. Click Apply.
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route
The Plan Trip subtab of the Route tab lets you estimate the fuel cost for your route using
the fuel rate (how many gallons of fuel your vehicle uses per mile/kilometer traveled) and
fuel price per gallon.
To Estimate the Fuel Cost of Your Route
Use the following steps to estimate the fuel cost of your route.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Plan Trip subtab on the Route tab.
3. Click Fuel Cost.
4. Type the fuel rate for your vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box. The fuel rate can often
be found in the vehicle's owners manual.
5. Type the price of your fuel in the Fuel Price text box.
The estimated fuel cost (in U.S. dollars) for your route automatically calculates when
you enter information in the Fuel Rate and Fuel Price text boxes. The estimated fuel
cost for your route displays in the Total Fuel Cost field.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the Plan Trip subtab.
Converting a Route to a GPS Log
You can convert any route to a GPS log file (.gpl).
To Convert a Route to a GPS Log File
Use the following steps to convert a route to a GPS log file.
1. Create a route.
186

Routing
2. Right-click the route, point to Manage Route, and then click Save as GPS Log
File. The Save Route as GPS Log File dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the .gpl file. The default location is
C:\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs.
4. Type the file name in the File Name text box.
5. Click Save.
187

Using GPS
GPS Overview
Using your DeLorme application, a portable computer, and your GPS receiver, you can
display a "bread crumb trail" to track your progress as you travel.
You have two ways to use GPS in your mapping application:
• NavMode–This is the default GPS view—a hands free full-screen view that you can
display in 2-D or 3-D. NavMode also allows you to use the E-Z Nav route wizard, the
easiest way to plan quick trips.
• GPS tab view–This option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and
tracking. By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible, but you can opt to hide
them. It is available only in 2-D mode.
For more information, see Using NavMode or GPS Tab View.
Safety
Warnings
• Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are driving
a vehicle.
• Do not use this application with automatic navigation, guidance
systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of distance
or direction.
GPS Options/Initializing GPS
Before beginning your GPS setup, read the user manual for your GPS receiver. Also, ensure
you have the appropriate cable and any necessary adapters to connect your GPS receiver to
the communications port of your portable computer.
If you have an Earthmate GPS device, it is automatically enabled when it is connected. Just
click Start GPS to begin tracking.
To Set GPS Options
• Manually change the location coordinates
Each time you track with GPS, the initialization process uses the coordinates from
the last initialized location.
Use the following steps to change these coordinates to those of your choice.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode
specified in your owner manual, and then turn the receiver on.
2. Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab.
3. Under GPS Options, verify that the Automatically detect GPS check box is
cleared.
4. Type the coordinates in the text boxes.
Note Coordinates display in the format specified in the Display tab of the
Options dialog box.
OR
189

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Click Use Map Center to set the coordinates to the latitude and longitude of
the current map center.
• Update the date/time options
You can use the date and time on your computer or you can change the date and
time settings used by the GPS device to those of your choice.
Use the following steps to change the date and/or time settings.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode
specified in your user manual, and then turn the receiver on.
2. Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab.
3. To use the date and time on your computer, select the Use Current System
Date/Time check box.
OR
To use the time and date of your choice, clear the Use Current System
Date/Time check box, and then:
• To manually set the time, select the time zone from the Zone dropdown
box, and if Daylight Saving Time is currently in effect where you
are, select the DST check box. Then, use the scroll box to select the
desired time.
Note Time is displayed in 24-hour format, with Midnight as 00:00:00.
• To manually set the date, click the down arrow next to the Date field
and select the date from the calendar.
• Set your preferences
You can set various options for how GPS works.
Use the following steps to change the When tracking... and GPS Options.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the GPS
Settings tab.
2. Set the preferences you want to use.
When tracking...
•
• Use NavMode–Enables a hands free full-screen view that you can view in 2-
D or 3-D.
• Use E-Z Nav route wizard–Opens the E-Z Nav route wizard when you start
GPS and you are using NavMode.
• Snap to route–Automatically locates the place on the route that is closest to
your vehicle's current location.
• Start GPS log–Automatically generates a GPS log.
• Use High-Contrast colors–Automatically enables high-contrast map colors.
• Magnify map–Automatically magnifies the map view to the specified
magnification (125%, 150%, 175%, or 200%).
• Recenter map on GPS–Automatically centers the map on the GPS.
• Rotate map in GPS direction–Automatically rotates the 2-D/3-D map in the
direction of travel. Direction of travel always displays as the top of the screen,
regardless of compass direction.
• Auto zoom to turn (2-D only)–Automatically pans and zooms the map to
display both the current GPS position and the position of the next turn. Select
data zoom levels from the Minimum zoom and Maximum zoom drop-down
190

Using GPS
lists to stop the map from zooming out/in further than you want it to when
approaching the next turn.
• Show GPS bread-crumb trail–Automatically displays your GPS progress on
the map as a "bread-crumb" trail up to the maximum specified number of
points. 5,000 points is approximately one hour and 20 minutes worth of
points. This setting does not affect the number of points captured in the GPS
log file. To change the point number, type the new number in the Trail
length box.
• Enable GPS voice navigation–Provides spoken directions when tracking a
route with a GPS receiver.
• Recalculate when off route–Automatically recalculates the route by the
designated threshold distance (100 ft, 200 ft, 300 ft, 400 ft, or 500 ft) when
the GPS is off of the route.
• Display GPS overview (2-D only)–When selected, opens the GPS overview
window after the GPS is connected. You can adjust the size of the map and
overview areas. The overview map does not display when you use NavMode
in 3-D.
• Disable screen saver–Overrides the system screen saver so that the display
stays activated during GPS tracking.
GPS Options
• Start GPS with the program–Automatically starts GPS tracking each time
you open the program.
• Automatically detect GPS–Automatically sets up your GPS connection.
Suggestion: If your GPS receiver has a USB cable, select Automatically Detect
GPS to ensure the correct COM port is detected for your device and that a
connection can be made.
• Enable WAAS use (USB Earthmate)–Enables WAAS use. This option is
selected by default.
• Enable LED on GPS device (USB Earthmate)—Turns on the LED on the
Earthmate. When the check box is cleared, the LED does not display.
To Initialize Your GPS Receiver
If you are using a non-DeLorme Earthmate GPS receiver, you must initialize it before you
use it. The initializing process can take several minutes before the program detects the
correct communications (COM) port and updates the current settings. Use the following
procedure to initialize your GPS receiver for use with your application.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode specified
in your user manual, and then turn the on receiver, if necessary.
2. Click the GPS tab and then click Clear Trail to delete any GPS points from the
current map display.
3. Click the Options button on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the GPS tab in the Options dialog box.
OR
Click the GPS tab and click the Options button .
4. From the Device drop-down list, select the type of GPS receiver you are using. If
your device is not listed, select Generic NMEA.
191

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Note The Settings text box automatically displays the default settings for the
selected device.
5. From the Port drop-down list, select the communications port you are using to
attach the GPS receiver to your computer. See your computer manual for further
information.
6. You can also change the location coordinates, update the date/time options, set
tracking options, and select GPS options. See To Set GPS Options above.
5. Click OK to exit the Options dialog and return to the main GPS tab.
6. Click Start GPS on the GPS tab
OR
Click the Start GPS button on the toolbar.
Notes
• The status of your GPS connection displays on the screen. Once your GPS receiver
acquires a fix on your location, your position on the map displays as a yellow or
green dot that changes to an arrow as you travel. For more information, see
Monitoring Your GPS Status.
• While your receiver is acquiring data, many red dots display on your map (except
with Magellan receivers). You may have to zoom in to see them clearly. These red
dots are positioned at the readings taken by the GPS receiver as it is acquiring data.
• Magellan receivers do not display any data until you are moving.
• If you have the HotSync manager loaded in the startup (the default configuration), it
reserves the COM port. If that is the one where the GPS receiver is attached, you
must exit HotSync manager for the GPS receiver to initialize. To do this, right-click
the HotSync icon on the taskbar and click Exit. If you have two COM ports, verify the
correct COM port is selected for use with your application. This pertains to older
devices.
• Any questions or problems regarding the operation of your GPS receiver should be
directed to its manufacturer.
Using NavMode or GPS Tab View
The default GPS view is NavMode—a hands free full-screen view that you can display in 2-D
or 3-D. By default, the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are minimized; however, you
can change your display options. When using NavMode, the E-Z Nav route wizard is enabled
by default.
The GPS tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and tracking.
By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible, but you can opt to hide them. It is
available only in 2-D mode.
To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode
button on the toolbar. When the button
appears indented , NavMode is on.
Note The button is grayed out unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are playing
back a GPS log file.
You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
192

Using GPS
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar and click the GPS tab. You can
also click the Options button on the GPS tab.
2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to turn it on.
3. Click OK.
NavMode Display
• Next Turn—The distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
• Dist to Finish—The distance to the finish point on your route, based on the units
selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
• ETA—The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route. This is based on the
time and time zone set on your computer. If your trip goes beyond the current day,
the day of arrival also displays. The ETA does not include any layover time at a stop.
• GPS Fix—Indicates if your GPS fix is 2-D or 3-D. If you do not have a fix or if the
GPS is acquiring a fix, "No Fix" displays.
• Speed—Displays the speed you are traveling, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
• Radar Results—If you are using GPS Radar, an orange bar displays the closest
search result. Click Stop Here to insert a stop into your route. Click More Info to
open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab and get more information about the
result. Click Stop Radar to stop searching.
• Progress Bar—The progress bar displays below the orange bar. It shows how far
along you are in your route by distance.
• Turns—The blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn in large text
and the following turn in smaller text. An arrow showing the direction of each turn
displays next to the text.
• Zoom In/Out—Click the plus sign in the Turns area to zoom the map in. Click the
minus sign to zoom the map out.
• Left 2-D or 3-D/Right 2-D–You can choose to view the left map in 2-D or 3-D or
the right map in 2-D. Click the button for the view you want. To view both the right
and left map, use the resize tool to change the map area.
Tracking a Route with GPS
When tracking, you can follow along a road route you created using any of the routing
methods in your mapping program. As you travel, the current leg (segment) of your route is
highlighted on the map.
Notes
• To automatically recalculate your route when off track, on the Route tab, select the
Auto check box next to the Back on Track button on the New/Edit subtab. If you do
not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track, clear the
Back on Track check box and click Back on Track whenever you want to recalculate
the route based on the current GPS position.
• If you want to create a log of your travels, select the Start GPS Log check box in the
GPS tab of the Options dialog to log automatically. Or, click the Record button in the
GPS Log subtab to log manually start recording.
193

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• The Turns option is available in routes only when GPS tracking.
• To Start GPS Tracking
Use the following steps to track your movement as you travel.
1. Create a route.
Important If the current map file includes hidden routes, they may recalculate if
you selected the Auto Back on Track check box or if you selected the Recalculate
When Off Route check box in the GPS Settings. To ensure this does not occur, clear
these check boxes or delete the routes you do not want to recalculate.
2. Connect your GPS device to your computer.
3. Initialize the device. This step is not necessary if you are using an Earthmate GPS
device.
4. In NavMode, click the GPS button on the toolbar.
Click here for a description of the screen display.
OR
In GPS tab view, click the GPS tab and then click the Status subtab. For more
information, see Monitoring Your GPS Status. Then, click Start GPS or click the GPS
button on the toolbar.
Click here for a description of the Show Turns area on the Route tab.
• Next Turn–Displays the next turn and a turn graphic indicating the direction;
the distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on the Display tab
in the Options dialog box; and the time to the next turn.
• Next Stop–The distance and estimated time to the next stop.
• Finish–The distance and estimated time to the finish.
Click the Show More Turns button to view information for the turn after the
following turn.
click Show List to return to the Directions dialog area.
• Next Turn–The distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on the
Display tab in the Options dialog box.
• Dist to Finish–The distance to the finish point on your route, based on the
units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
• ETA–The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route. This is based on
the time and time zone set on your computer. If your trip goes beyond the
current day, the day of arrival also displays. The ETA does not include any
layover time at a stop.
• Speed–Displays the speed you are traveling, based on the units selected on
the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
• Radar Results–If you are using GPS Radar, an orange bar displays the
closest search result. Click Stop Here to insert a stop into your route. Click
More Info to open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab and get more
information about the result. Click Stop Radar to stop searching.
• Progress Bar–The progress bar displays below the orange bar. It shows how
far along you are in your route by distance.
• Turns–The blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn in large
text and the following turn in smaller text. An arrow showing the direction of
each turn displays next to the text.
194

Using GPS
• Zoom In/Out–Click the plus sign in the Turns area to zoom the map in. Click
the minus sign to zoom the map out.
• 2-D or 3-D–You can view the map in 2-D or 3-D. The option you are NOT
using shows—click the button to use that view.
To Stop GPS Tracking
In NavMode, click the GPS button
In GPS tab view, click the GPS button
Stop GPS.
on the toolbar.
on the toolbar or click the GPS tab and then click
Getting Back on Track When Off Course
To automatically recalculate your route when off course, select the Auto check box next to
the Back on Track button in the Route tab. If you do not want the program to automatically
recalculate your route when off track, clear the Auto check box and click the Back on
Track button to manually recalculate the route.
Using the E-Z Nav Route Wizard
Use the E-Z Nav route wizard with NavMode when tracking with your GPS device. Planning a
trip to a single destination is simple and quick.
By default, the E-Z Nav route wizard is enabled to open when you start your GPS. You can
change this setting on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box. To use the E-Z Nav route
wizard at any time while using Nav Mode, click the E-Z Nav button
corner of the map.
For more information, see the Use the E-Z Nav Route Wizard tutorial.
in the top right
Tips
• To use GPS Radar with an E-Z Nav route, create your route, and then use the Find
tab to set up your GPS Radar search.
• If you do not find the search result you are looking for within a sub-category, try
using the "All..." sub-category to expand your search.
To Navigate the Pages in the Wizard
• Click to go back to the previous screen.
• Click to see another page of results.
• Click to see the previous page of results.
To Use the E-Z Nav Route Wizard
Before you start, set your GPS preferences on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box. If you
have a GPS device from a manufacturer other than DeLorme, you must initialize it before
you travel.
1. Connect your GPS device to your computer and click the GPS button in the
toolbar.
195

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Tip If you want GPS to start when you open the program, select the Start GPS
with the program check box on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box.
2. To search near your current GPS location, ensure the Near Current Location option
is highlighted.
OR
To search near another location, click Near Other Location. On the next screen,
type the new location in the box. The more information you provide, the narrower
the search results will be. Click the search location you want to use.
3. Click the search category. Results are listed in order of distance from the location
you are searching and an arrow shows the direction from your location.
• Address or Location
Type an address or location in the box. The more information you provide, the
narrower the search results will be.
• My Locations
Select one of the following:
• Recent Locations–Recent E-Z Nav routes. Click a route to open its
detail page.
• Address Book–The entries from the address book on the Find tab.
• Waypoints–Waypoints in the current map file. Create waypoints on
the Draw tab.
• Food & Restaurants
This category includes points of interest (POIs). Select All... or select a subcategory.
• Auto & Travel
This category includes points of interest (POIs). Select All... or select a subcategory.
• Shopping & Recreation
This category includes points of interest (POIs). Select All... or select a subcategory.
• Emergency & Community
This category includes points of interest (POIs). Select All... or select a subcategory.
4. When you see the result you want, click it to open its details page. You can view the
map before you create a route or you can just route to it. Click the option you want
to use.
• View Map–The map displays the search result for 15 seconds and then
reverts to the details page. To close the map view at any time, click the E-Z
Nav button in the top right corner of the map.
Note The map displays in 2-D even if you are in 3-D mode.
• Create Route–The route is created and you can start navigating.
Note When you close the program, you will be asked if you want to save the "E-Z Nav
Route." Only the most recent E-Z Nav route is saved under that name. If you want to save a
route for future reference, BEFORE you close the program, open the Route tab and change
the route name.
Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking
196

Using GPS
When using the application with a GPS receiver to track a route, your map automatically
pans and redraws as you travel, always indicating your position on the map when Center on
GPS is activated.
To Automatically Pan the Map
The following procedure demonstrates how the check box and button work together
to automatically pan the map.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar (or click the menu arrow and click
Options) and then click the GPS Settings tab.
OR
Click the GPS tab to open it and click the Options button .
2. Under When Tracking, clear the Recenter Map on GPS check box. If you pan the
map manually during GPS tracking, Center on GPS displays in the Control Panel.
OR
Select the Recenter Map on GPS check box. If you pan the map manually during
GPS tracking, the map automatically re-centers itself on your location after 5
seconds.
3. Click OK.
4. Click the GPS tab and click Start GPS.
OR
Click the GPS button on the toolbar.
Notes
• The Center on GPS button displays and is activated by default on the Control Panel
when the Recenter Map on GPS option is selected.
• If you deactivate the Center on GPS button, you can continue to manually pan the map
or use the search function in the Find tab.
• When you are done with other tasks, click Center on GPS in the Control Panel to
resume tracking.
Playing Back a Log File
After you log a route with your GPS receiver, you can play it back in the mapping
application and review your entire journey on-screen.
Your log will play back in NavMode unless you have it turned off. For more information, see
Using NavMode or GPS Tab View.
Notes
• You cannot play back a log file if you are currently tracking with a GPS receiver.
• Zooming in on the map allows you to see the log file in greater detail.
• When you play back a log file in NavMode, the tab area is not minimized; this allows
you to control the playback.
To Play Back a Log File
Use the following steps to play back and review a log file.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
197

Street Atlas USA User Guide
4. Single click the file you want to view.
The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location, start time,
start coordinate, total distance, duration, finish location, finish time, finish
coordinate, and the number of readings for the selected log. Log files have .gpl
extensions and are saved by default in C:\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs.
5. Click Open.
6. Click the Play button to begin playing back your log.
OR
Drag the slider in the Progress Bar (see graphic at the end of this topic) to the
point in the log you want to play.
Note Playing back a log file defaults to 1x, which occurs in real time and takes the
same amount of time as the original trip did; for example, if your trip took six hours,
the on-screen tracking process also takes six hours.
You can also:
• From the Playback Speed drop-down list, select an option (2x, 5x, 10x, 25x,
or 50x) to increase the tracking speed accordingly.
• Click the Pause button to pause the tracking of the log file. The Pause
button turns blue to indicate the file is paused. Click the Play button to continue
playing back the file.
• Click the Stop button to stop the play back. To start the file over, click
the Play button again.
• Click and hold the Rewind button to rewind the log file to a particular
point.
• Click and hold the Forward button to fast forward the log file to a
particular point.
• Drag the slider in the Progress Bar to view a particular point in the log. You can
drag the slider forward or backward.
Previewing a GPS Log File
There are two ways to view an existing GPS log. You can play it back and watch it in real
time (point-by-point), or you can preview it and view the entire log area without waiting for
the playback to finish.
To Preview a Log File
Use the following steps to preview a log file.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Single click the file you want to view.
The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location, start time,
start coordinate, total distance, duration, finish location, finish time, finish
coordinate, and the number of readings for the selected log.
198

Using GPS
5. Click Open.
6. Click File and then click File Preview.
The map centers on your log location.
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log
If you want more information about your GPS log than just seeing where you've been on the
map, the File Details option in the GPS Log subtab can give you a variety of information
about your journey.
For even more specific information about your log, simply play back or preview your log and
then right-click a specific GPS point on the map to learn the date and time the point was
obtained as well as the speed, bearing, elevation, and GPS status for that particular point.
To View File Details for a GPS Log
Use the following steps to view log file details.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Select the file you want to view details for and then click Open.
5. Click File and then click File Details.
A dialog box shows information about your log.
6. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Monitoring Your GPS Status
Once you initialize your GPS and begun tracking, you can continue to monitor the status of
your GPS connection and other information. Status information accuracy is affected by
speed (3 mph or more) and your GPS status. 3-D status provides the most accurate
information.
To Monitor Your GPS Status in GPS Tab View
Speed and Heading
Speed–Displays the speed you are traveling
based on the units you selected on the Display
tab in the Options dialog box.
Heading–Displays the direction you are traveling
as degrees T (True North) or M (Magnetic North)
based on the bearing selected on the Units area
on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Heading is provided as a numerical value as well
as a compass direction.
Coordinates/Elevation
199

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Coordinates–The coordinate fields display based on the units you selected
on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Elevation–Displays the current elevation if the GPS status is 3-D and is
based on the selected Units preference. Elevation can be displayed with a
2-D status; your position is indicated accurately on your screen as you
travel unless you are in an area where your elevation varies greatly.
GPS Status
No GPS–A red circle with a slash indicates the GPS receiver is not yet
detected by your computer. This status usually displays when initialization first
begins.
Acquiring–A red blinking circle indicates the GPS receiver is not yet receiving
sufficient satellite data to determine your position. This status displays while
the GPS receiver is acquiring satellite data and can take several minutes.
2-D–A yellow circle indicates the GPS connection is successful but there is
insufficient satellite data to determine your GPS position. This usually
indicates insufficient data for an accurate location due to:
• Only three satellites being used
• Poor signals from the satellites.
Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception.
3-D–A green circle indicates the GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite
data to determine your location. When the status reads 3-D, your current
coordinates, elevation, and heading are displayed, along with the speed you
are currently traveling.
Note If you are tracking with a WAAS-enabled device, a 3-D fix displays as
"3-D DGPS."
To Monitor Your GPS Status in NavMode
In NavMode, you can view your speed, ETA, next turn, and distance to finish. To view other
GPS status information, use the tab view.
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information
Click Sat. Info in the GPS tab to view the current satellite status. Sat. Info is a toggle
button that switches to Status. Click Status to return to the original Status dialog area.
Dilution of Precision
The Dilution of Precision area lists your Position Dilution of Precision,
your Horizontal Dilution of Precision, and your Vertical Dilution of
Precision. For definitions of these terms, see Glossary Terms.
Satellite Listing
200

Using GPS
The Satellite Listing window displays the satellites that are currently
visible in the sky. The columns list the satellite number, elevation,
azimuth, and signal-to-noise ratio.
Satellite Listing information is only available for DeLorme receivers and
NMEA-compatible receivers.
Almanac
When using a DeLorme GPS receiver, the Almanac window displays the
satellite number and its current status.
N–Indicates the satellite is being used for navigation.
E–Indicates ephemeris data is available for the satellite.
T–Indicates the satellite is currently being tracked by your GPS
receiver.
D–Indicates differential data is available for that satellite.
Notes
• Differential data is available on WAAS-enabled devices.
• Almanac information is available only for DeLorme receivers.
Skyview
The Skyview diagram indicates visible satellites, their number (assigned by
the Department of Defense), and their position in the sky relative to your
current position. Each satellite is color coded, based on the quality of data
it is transmitting.
Gray–Indicates the satellite's position in the sky.
Red–Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but it is not
receiving data from it.
Yellow–(DeLorme GPS receivers only) Indicates your receiver is tracking
the satellite, ephemeris data is available, but the satellite is not being used
for navigation.
Green–Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite, ephemeris data
is available, and the satellite is being used for navigation.
Dark Green–WAAS-enabled receivers only. Indicates your receiver is
tracking the satellite, ephemeris data is available, the satellite is being used
for navigation, and the satellite has DGPS and WAAS corrections available.
Blue–WAAS-enabled receivers only. Indicates a WAAS satellite used for
corrections.
Viewing Sun and Moon Information
You can use the Sun/Moon subtab in the GPS tab to view information about the rising and
setting of the Sun and Moon relative to a specified date, time, and location.
To View Sun and Moon Information
Use the following steps to view Sun and Moon information in the GPS tab.
1. Click the GPS tab.
2. Click the Sun/Moon subtab.
201

Street Atlas USA User Guide
3. Click the down arrow next to the date to change the date.
4. Use the scroll arrows to change the time.
5. After you update the date and time, you can view:
• The Sun and Moon traveling across the compass as time passes with the
Sun/Moon compass. In the center of the compass, a shadow grows and
shrinks and changes direction as the Sun moves across the compass (similar
to a sun dial).
• Sun rise/set and Moon rise/set information.
• Moon cycle information (such as the day of the moon cycle and the phase).
GPS Devices
DeLorme software interfaces with different GPS devices as outlined below.
• DeLorme GPS Devices–DeLorme GPS devices work with DeLorme software
programs.
• USB GPS Support–DeLorme software can use the data output from a USB GPS if
the device meets one of the following criteria:
• When the GPS is attached to the computer, it is recognized and displayed
under Ports in the Windows Device Manager.
• The unit is a GARMIN USB device and the GARMIN drivers are installed.
Note Magellan USB devices are not currently supported.
• Serial GPS Support–DeLorme software can use the data output from a serial GPS
device. The device must be connected to a free COM port and output a generic NMEA
(National Marine Electronics Association) stream.
• Bluetooth GPS Support–DeLorme software can use the data output from a
Bluetooth GPS device. You must configure your Bluetooth software to create a virtual
serial port.
Safety
Warnings
• Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are driving
a vehicle.
• Do not use this application with automatic navigation, guidance
systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of distance
or direction.
About GPS
What is GPS?
The Global Positioning System (GPS) applies modern technology to the ancient basics of
navigation. The U.S. Department of Defense has developed and launched a series of
positioning satellites in an orbiting constellation. These satellites are used as reference
points much the same way stars have been used in conventional navigation.
Using these satellites, a GPS receiver can determine your position anywhere on the globe.
GPS provides accurate information about coordinate position, elevation, speed, and
direction of travel. Many people have discovered the benefits of GPS for tracking vehicles,
recording routes, and much more.
202

Using GPS
How Does GPS Work?
The GPS constellation consists of 24 satellites, each carrying several atomic clocks to ensure
the most accurate time possible. The satellites broadcast low-power radio waves containing
the satellite's identity code and the exact time (to the nanosecond) that the message was
sent.
When a GPS receiver picks up a satellite signal, it identifies the satellite and compares the
signal time with its own clock. The time difference represents the time it has taken for that
radio wave to travel from the satellite to the receiver. Since radio waves travel at the speed
of light, the time difference can be used to calculate the distance from the satellite to the
GPS receiver.
The satellite's identity code provides the location of the satellite, and the distance to the
receiver creates a sphere of possible locations for the GPS receiver. Without more
information, the receiver only knows that it is located somewhere on that sphere.
Two additional satellites are necessary to narrow down the receiver's possible position. Each
of these satellites sends a similar radio message containing time and identity information.
The GPS receiver checks the orbital location of each satellite and uses the elapsed time to
create two additional spheres of possible locations. These three spheres intersect at two
points; however, one of these points is eliminated because it is far away from the earth's
surface. Therefore, the second point is assumed to be correct. The data from these three
satellites provides the receiver with a two-dimensional location.
Data acquired from a fourth satellite pinpoints the receiver's exact location. This additional
positioning information allows the GPS receiver to calculate its elevation, which is
particularly important for GPS users in mountainous locations.
GPS Position Accuracy
The accuracy of the data your GPS receiver provides is dependent upon many factors,
including the quality of your equipment. A low-quality clock within the receiver decreases
the accuracy of your location. The atmosphere, the ionosphere, and the number of channels
your receiver can handle all affect the accuracy of your system. Consult your GPS hardware
manuals for information on how your receiver adjusts for errors.
Any buildings, natural structures, or heavy foliage that obstruct the GPS antenna's view of
the sky prevent satellite signals from reaching the receiver and decreases the accuracy of
your position.
Your accuracy will also depend on your level of clearance with the U.S. Department of
Defense. There are two available radio signals that receivers can use: the Standard
Positioning Service (SPS) for civilians and the Precise Positioning Service (PPS) for military
and authorized personnel.
203

Using Small-screen Devices
Using Small-screen Devices
You can use your mapping application with small-screen devices, such as netbooks and
UMPCs (Ultra Mobile PCs). If you are installing Street Atlas USA on a netbook or smallscreen
device, select Netbook Mode as the default mode when you install Street Atlas USA.
If you do not select Netbook Mode when you install, you can enable it at any time: Click the
Options menu arrow
and click Netbook Mode to select the check box. To turn
off Netbook Mode, clear the check box.
The default interface minimizes the tab area, hides the Control Panel, and shows only the
toolbar buttons you need for navigating and tracking on a small screen; however, you can
add or remove tabs, show or hide toolbar buttons, and customize the interface to meet your
needs.
This screen is optimized for a netbook and is displaying GPS with NavMode in 3-D.
Your Street Atlas license allows you to install a copy of the software on a portable device in
addition to your computer. Please see the license agreement for your software for further
information:
Street Atlas USA Plus Single-User License Agreement
205

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
Voice Overview
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Using the speech recognition and text-to-speech technology included in your application,
you can issue a series of voice commands to a laptop computer. The voice commands
activate basic navigation, map control, and GPS features, providing you with hands-free
program navigation so you can concentrate on your driving. When tracking with a GPS
receiver, you can receive spoken updates about your route directions, next turn, next stop,
current location, etc.
Notes
• The Voice label on the Voice tab displays red when the microphone is activated.
• Your application comes equipped with Microsoft® English Recognizer Version 5.1.
You can also use other speech recognition engines that you may have purchased
separately from other software companies. Such speech recognition engines must
support SAPI 5.1 to be available to you in your application. See the Speech
settings in the Windows Control Panel for more information about your engine.
• If you have purchased other voices (text-to-speech engines) that are SAPI 5.1-
compatible, they are available in your application.
• You must have a microphone attached to your computer to use speech
recognition (for input).
• For tips on using the speech recognition feature and setting up your microphone,
see Speech Recognition Tips.
• If you are having difficulty hearing the voice output, adjust the volume on your
external speakers or adjust your computer's volume using the settings in the
Windows® Control Panel.
• If you chose the custom installation option when you installed your application,
you were asked whether or not to install a speech recognition engine for voice
input. If you want to use voice input and selected not to install a speech
recognition engine when you installed the program, you must uninstall and then
reinstall the application, making sure to select to install the speech recognition
engine.
• The speech recognition engine is automatically installed on Windows Vista
operating systems.
• If you have another DeLorme product installed and already opted to install
the speech recognition engine, you may not see the option to install it
again.
Voice Options
Click a link to learn more about the Voice tab in the Options dialog box:
• Training the Speech Recognition Engine
207

Street Atlas USA User Guide
• Speech Recognition Tips
• Changing Voice Output
• Voice Preferences
Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Use the Voice tab to view status information about your microphone and the list of available
voice commands.
• The Microphone bar (VU meter) indicates the level of sound received from the
microphone.
• The Command Status area displays either the last recognized voice command or one
of the following error messages:
•
• Too noisy
• No signal
• Input too loud
• Input too quiet
• The Commands box lists the voice commands for accessing the Voice tab,
navigating, using the map, and using GPS. It shows the availability of the commands
and their shortcut keys. You can double-click a command to issue it.
To Activate and Monitor the Speech Recognition Feature
Use the following steps to activate and monitor the speech recognition feature.
1. Click the Voice tab.
2. Select the Microphone check box to activate your microphone and to turn on the
speech recognition feature.
The tab name turns red if the microphone is listening to your commands.
Note If your microphone is active when you exit the program, it will still be active
when you re-enter the application.
3. To trigger an audible signal when a voice command is recognized, select the Beep
When Heard check box.
4. To display all of the possible voice commands, including variations of the commands,
select the Show All Commands check box.
Both enabled and disabled commands are displayed.
Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS is not
initialized.
Training the Speech Recognition Engine
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
208

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
You should train the speech recognition engine to provide good speech recognition results.
Before training, ensure your microphone is active and the speech recognition feature is on.
For more information, see Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition.
To Train the Engine to Recognize Your Speech Patterns
You should train the speech recognition engine to recognize your specific speech patterns.
This is often done by reading a predetermined piece of text supplied by the creator of the
speech recognition engine. If the engine supports multiple user models, you can train the
engine to recognize more than one speech pattern.
Use the following steps to train the speech recognition engine to recognize your speech
patterns.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Voice Settings tab.
3. Select the microphone you intend to use from the Microphone drop-down list.
4. Select your preferred user voice model from the User Profile drop-down list.
Note To create a new speech recognition profile for each of your working
environments (noisy, quiet) and users (your spouse, your child), click Speech in the
Windows Control Panel.
5. Select your preferred speech recognition engine from the Recognizer drop-down
list.
Note Select the most recent version available in the drop-down list.
6. Click Speech Profile Training to display the speech training wizard specific to your
speech recognition engine.
Note This feature is available only if it is supported by your speech recognition
engine.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Tips
For best results:
• Use a close-talk microphone that rests near the side of your mouth instead of a
desktop or built-in microphone.
• Train the speech recognition engine in the same environment in which you will use it.
For example, if you use the engine mostly in the car, perform training in the car.
Perform three training sessions to get the best results.
• When training, speak the same voice as you will when giving voice commands to the
computer. Speak distinctly and at an average speed, as if giving a command.
• Use the Microphone Wizard to ensure your microphone is working correctly and to
view tips on microphone selection and placement. To use the wizard, click
Microphone Setup on the Voice tab of the Options dialog. Or, from the Start menu
on your computer, browse to the Control Panel and double-click the Speech icon to
open the Speech Properties dialog box.
• To increase the likelihood of correct speech recognition, on the Voice Settings tab in
the Options dialog box, select the Commands start with check box and then type
the appropriate word/phrase in the text box (if using a single word, use a word with
more than one syllable). For example, if you type computer, you would then say
"Computer, zoom in."
209

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Voice Commands
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Your application includes Route, Map, GPS, and Voice tab control commands. Select the
Show All Commands check box to view all options, including those which are variations or
unavailable.
Route Tab Commands
The following table shows navigation voice commands for the Route tab. If there is a
keyboard shortcut available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
What is the next turn?
(F5)
What's the next turn?
(F5)
Response
Speaks the next turn name, time to turn, distance to turn,
bearing to turn, and turn direction. Displays the Directions
subtab in the Route tab.
Next turn. (F5)
Show next turn. (F6)
Center on next turn.
What is the next stop?
What's the next stop?
Next stop
Show next stop. (F7)
Center on next stop.
After that.
Are we there yet?
Show finish. (F8)
Center on finish.
Directions.
Where am I?
Coordinates.
Displays current location and next turn. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Centers map on the next turn. Displays the Directions subtab
in the Route tab.
Speaks the next stop name, distance to stop, bearing to stop,
and time to stop. Displays the Directions subtab in the Route
tab.
Displays current location and next stop. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Centers map on the next stop. Displays the Directions subtab
in the Route tab.
Speaks the next stop or turn information, depending on the
previous spoken direction.
Speaks the finish name, time to finish, and distance to finish.
Displays current location and finish on the map.
Centers map on the finish. Displays the Directions subtab in
the Route tab.
Speaks the next turn, next stop, finish, name, time, and
distance. Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Speaks current route segment, heading, speed, town, county,
and state.
Speaks the coordinate of your current location.
210

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
Shush.
Be quiet.
Voice nav on. (F2)
Voice nav off. (F2)
Show route.
Back on track.
Continue route from here.
(F9)
Show turns.
Show directions.
Silences GPS voice navigation, but does not turn it off.
Silences GPS voice navigation, but does not turn it off.
Turns voice navigation (spoken turn directions) on.
Turns voice navigation (spoken turn directions) off.
Displays your route on the map.
Adds current GPS location as a stop and recalculates the
route.
Adds current location as a stop and recalculates the route.
Activates the Show Turns dialog area in the Route tab.
Activates the Directions subtab in the Route tab.
Show list.
Map Commands
The following table shows main map voice commands. If there is a keyboard shortcut
available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
Pan left. (ALT+Left)
Response
Pans (or scrolls) the map left.
Scroll left. (ALT+Left)
Pan right. (ALT+Right)
Pans (or scrolls) the map right.
Scroll right. (ALT+Right)
Pan up. (ALT+UP)
Pans (or scrolls) the map up.
Scroll up. (ALT+UP)
Pan down. (ALT+DOWN)
Pans (or scrolls) the map down.
Scroll down. (ALT+DOWN)
Zoom in. (ALT+PAGE
DOWN)
Zoom out. (ALT+PAGE
UP)
Zoom in times.
Zoom out times.
Zoom level .
Previous map.
Zooms in one level.
Zooms out one level.
Zooms in the specified number of levels.
Zooms out the specified number of levels.
Zooms to specified level.
Displays the previous map.
Go back.
GPS Tab Commands
211

Street Atlas USA User Guide
The following table shows GPS voice commands. If there is a keyboard shortcut available, it
is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
Start GPS. (CTRL+G)
Stop GPS. (CTRL+G)
GPS status.
Monitor GPS.
Response
Starts GPS tracking.
Stops GPS tracking.
Displays the GPS Status subtab.
Displays the GPS Monitor subtab.
GPS Monitor.
Center on GPS. (ALT+P)
Stop centering on GPS.
(ALT+P)
Recenters the map on the current GPS location.
Stops the map from recentering on your current GPS
location.
Stop center on GPS.
(ALT+P)
Clear GPS.
Autorotate map on.
(ALT+R)
Autorotate map off.
(ALT+R)
Autozoom map on.
(ALT+Z)
Autozoom map off.
(ALT+Z)
Clears the GPS "bread crumb trail" from the map.
Turns automatic map rotation on.
Turns automatic map rotation off.
When GPS tracking, turns automatic zoom on.
When GPS tracking, turns automatic zoom off.
Voice Tab Commands
The following table shows Voice tab voice commands and the response. If there is a
keyboard shortcut available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command
What can I say?
More commands.
Repeat last command.
Response
Displays the Monitor dialog box.
Displays next page of voice commands.
Repeats your last spoken command.
Speech Recognition Tips
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
The following tips provide information on using the speech recognition feature and setting
up your microphone.
• Speech recognition is only active when your application is the active window.
212

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
• Commands become enabled based on your current GPS status, your data zoom level,
and other factors. Enabled commands do not have a red "x" on the icon.
• Disabled commands have a red "x" on the icon.
Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS has not
been initialized.
• Avoid noisy environments when using voice command navigation.
• Use a close-talk microphone for best speech recognition results.
• Properly position your microphone to achieve the best speech recognition results. For
a close-talk microphone, the recommended position is a thumb-width from the
corner of your mouth and slightly to the side. For more information, see the note at
the end of this topic.
• When issuing commands to the computer, use the same tone that was used when
during the speech recognition engine training.
• Keep the microphone as far as possible from the car radio or console, computer
speakers, or other speakers.
• If your microphone is near your speakers, and you are using the microphone
together with voice reminders (GPS VoiceNav), the program may recognize some of
the words that it is speaking and react to them. Here are ways to eliminate this
problem:
• Make sure that you have chosen the Voice Output device (speakers, headset)
and the Input device (on-board microphone, headset microphone) that you
intend to use with DeLorme GPS voice navigation. Use the selections that are
available in the Voice settings tab in the Options dialog box.
• If more than one speech recognizer is available in the drop-down list, choose
the most recent (highest version number).
• Your best speech recognition responses will always be to use a close-talk
microphone with voice output using the laptop speakers rather than a
headphone speaker so that the computer will not "hear itself."
• If you are speaking with someone else in the room, have a radio or television
on, and so on, the computer may think those sounds are commands to follow.
Select the Microphone check box on the Voice tab only when you intend to
use it. If you exit the program with the Microphone check box selected, the
program will start speech recognition again when you restart the program.
Voice recognition requires a lot of disk space and slows down the system if
you are not using it. Remember: the Voice tab displays with red font
whenever the microphone is listening.
• Use the Commands Start With feature in the Voice tab in the Options dialog
to clearly distinguish commands from other noise and speech. Set the
Commands Start With phrase to something like “computer” or “Simon Says”
to reduce the chances of an unexpected command recognition. When
choosing a phrase, make sure that it is more than one syllable. The phrases
"computer" or "Simon Says" work well. But the simple word "map" probably
will not.
• Train the speech recognition system in the environment in which you will use
it (for example, in a noisy car).
Note To find out the proper position for your microphone model, or to find tips on how to
purchase a microphone, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or click the
arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click Options to open
the dialog box), click the Voice Settings tab, and then click Microphone Setup. Or, from
213

Street Atlas USA User Guide
the Start menu on your computer, browse to the Control Panel and double-click the Speech
icon to open the Speech Properties dialog box.
Changing Voice Output
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
Your application offers text-to-speech technology so you can receive spoken updates about
your route directions, next turn, next stop, current location, time to finish, or current
coordinates when navigating with a GPS receiver. Text-to-speech allows hands-free
navigation of the program on your computer.
Use your text-to-speech engine to change and preview the tone and quality of the
computer's voice.
To Change the Voice Output
Use the following steps to change your computer's voice.
1. Click the Options button on the toolbar.
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then, click
Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Voice Settings tab.
3. From the Voice drop-down list box, select a voice from the list of options.
A description of the selected voice displays to the right of the drop-down list box.
Note If you have purchased SAPI 5.1-compatible voices from another software
vendor, they are included in this list.
4. From the Device drop-down list box, select the output device from which you want
to hear the computer's voice (for example, your speakers or a headset).
5. To preview the voice, click Test Voice, type a sample sentence, and then click OK.
The sample sentence is spoken in the selected voice.
6. Use the Voice Volume spin box to adjust the output volume relative to the other
programs you are running. By default, this is set to 100 (maximum). Note that you
cannot set the volume higher than your speakers or Windows Control Panel settings
capabilities.
Note Click Audio Controls to access additional volume settings.
7. Use the Speaking Rate spin box to adjust the rate at which the computer's voice
will speak. A value of 50 is normal.
Voice Preferences
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.
The Voice tab in the Options dialog displays a series of Engine Option buttons. These option
buttons allow you to view information or change preference settings in your speech
recognition or text-to-speech engines. Some speech recognition or text-to-speech engines
do not support some of the preference options.
214

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
To View and Update Speech Recognition Preferences
To change speech input preferences, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or
click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click Options
to open the dialog box), and then click the Voice Settings tab. The following options are
available under the Speech Recognition area of the dialog box.
• Microphone Setup–Opens the Microphone Wizard to adjust speech recognition
whenever you change microphone or noise environments.
• Speech Profile Training–Opens Voice Training Wizard to train the engine to
recognize your speech patterns. This process may take 10–15 minutes to complete.
• DeLorme Training–Opens an abbreviated version of the Voice Training Wizard. This
dialog trains the system on DeLorme voice commands.
• Add/Delete Words–Opens the Add/Delete Words Wizard with the pronunciation
wizard specific to your speech recognition engine. You can enter, edit, or view the
words in your pronunciation vocabulary. Use this wizard when the speech recognition
has trouble understanding a specific word that you are saying.
• Recognition Settings–Opens the Recognition Profile Settings dialog. Use this to
change preferences for sensitivity and tolerance of errors in recognizing your voice.
Note Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version
5.1. You may have a premium version (for example, Microsoft Office 2003 installs
Microsoft English U.S. Version 6.1 Recognizer). Select the most recent version.
To View and Update Voice Output Preferences
To change voice output preferences, click the Options button
on the toolbar (or
click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click Options
to open the dialog box), and then click the Voice Settings tab. The following options are
available under the Voice Output area of the dialog box.
• Test Voice–Choose to display the preview voice dialog box for your text-to-speech
engine. Type in a sentence and click OK to hear it spoken.
• Audio Controls–Choose to adjust the speaker volume for all programs on your
computer. This is equivalent to the same adjustment in the Windows Control Panel.
Voice Prompts
Directions (spoken first or alone)
Proceed…
Continue straight...
Bear right…
Bear left…
Turn right…
Turn left…
Turn hard right…
Turn hard left…
Go east…
Go west…
Go north…
Go northeast…
215

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Go northwest…
Go south…
Go southeast…
Go southwest…
Direction distance modifiers (spoken second)
…in [distance in tenths of a mile]
Other (spoken alone)
At finish. [was: “Destination reached.”]
Last leg.
Approaching finish.
Off route.
216

Exchanging Information with A Third-party GPS Device
Sending Route Information
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to send route points
or route directions to your device.
To Send Route Points
Use the following steps to send route points to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your owner manual.
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Send to Device.
6. Select Route Points from the Object drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route points
you want to send to your device.
9. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point for the
new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box. Not
all devices support starting points. For more information, see your device manual.
10. Click Send to Device.
11. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
12. Click Finish.
To Send Route Directions
Use the following steps to send route directions to your GPS device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Send to Device.
6. Select Route Directions from the Object drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
directions you want to send to your device.
9. Designate a route name and/or a route number for the file on the device (device
dependent).
217

Street Atlas USA User Guide
10. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point for the
new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box. Not
all devices support starting points. For more information, see your device manual.
11. Click Send to Device.
12. Repeat the steps for each route file you wan to send to your device.
13. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button
the GPS tab.
Sending Tracks
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to send tracks to
your device.
To Send Tracks
Use the following steps to send tracks to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Send to Device.
6. Select User Map Data - Track from the Object drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the track file you want to send to your device from the Track File drop-down
list.
9. Optional. Designate a track name or a track number for the file on the device.
10. Click Send to Device.
11. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
12. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button
the GPS tab.
Sending Waypoints
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints
to your device.
To Send Waypoints
Use the following steps to send waypoints to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
on
on
218

Exchanging Information with A Third-party GPS Device
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your device manual..
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Send to Device.
6. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Object drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint File
drop-down list.
9. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point for the
new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box. Not
all devices support starting points. For more information, see your device manual.
10. Click Send to Device.
11. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
12. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button
the GPS tab.
Receiving a Route
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive routes
created on your device. Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive a Route
Use the following steps to receive a route from your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Receive from Device.
6. Select Route from the Object drop-down list.
7. Select Route from the Save As drop-down list.
8. Click Next.
9. Select the route name or route number on the device that you want to receive.
10. Select the route file you want to add the route information to. If you want to create a
new route file, select New from the Route drop-down list and type the new route
name in the available text box.
11. Click Receive from Device.
12. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to receive from your device.
13. Click Finish.
on
219

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button
the GPS tab.
Receiving a Track
on
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive tracks
created on your device. Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
Note When you open a track you've imported from your GPS device, you may notice that
the track does not join existing roads. Use the select tool in the Draw tab to snap the end
node of the track to a road. For more information, see Snapping Draw Objects.
To Receive a Track
Use the following steps to receive a track from your device and save it as a track.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Receive from Device.
6. Select Track from the Object drop-down list.
7. Select User Map Data - Track from the Save As drop-down list.
8. Click Next.
9. Select the track name or track number on the device that you want to receive. Not
all devices support downloading individual track logs. See your device manual for
more information.
10. Select the track file you want to add the track information to. To create a new track
file, select New from the Track File drop-down list and type the new track file name
in the New Track File text box.
11. Optional. Type a label for your track in the Track Label text box.
12. Click Receive from Device.
13. Repeat the steps for every track file you want to receive from your device.
14. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button
the GPS tab.
Receiving Waypoints
Third-party GPS
If you have a compatible GPS device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive
waypoints created on your device and save them as a draw file or as a waypoint file. Once
imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive Waypoints as a Waypoint File
Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your device.
on
220

Exchanging Information with A Third-party GPS Device
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific settings.
For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your GARMIN receiver
interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button on the toolbar.
4. Under Select Device, select GPS.
5. Select Receive from Device.
6. Select Waypoints from the Object drop-down list.
7. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Save As drop-down list.
8. Click Next.
9. Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the
Waypoint File drop-down list. To create a new Waypoint file, select New from the
Waypoint File drop-down list and type the new waypoint file name in the New
Waypoint File text box.
10. If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol (such as the
default red flag), select the Use Current Waypoint (active waypoint) option. If
you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third-party device, select the
Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set
from the drop-down list. For more information on creating a custom symbol set, see
Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol.
11. Click Receive From Device.
12. Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive.
13. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange Wizard by clicking the Exchange button
the GPS tab.
on
221

Using NetLink
NetLink
NetLink is an online portal within Street Atlas USA®. You must have an Internet connection
to use NetLink. To get help with NetLink, click the blue Help button on the NetLink tab.
223

Using GeoTagger
Getting Started with GeoTagger
Use the GeoTagger Wizard to sync digital photos with GPS log files (.gpl) and track files
(.an1) and tag them to the location you took them. You can place images as an actual
image on the map, a MapNote with a hyperlink, or a symbol with a hyperlink.
To open the GeoTagger Wizard, click the GeoTagger button on the toolbar. The
Geotagger button is hidden by default; to show it, right-click the toolbar to open the menu
and click GeoTagger.
Important! Make sure the time and date on your camera and on your GPS device match
before you begin. This ensures that your images are correctly matched to the GPS log file or
track file. If you do not have the correct time on your camera, you can update the
information with the Timestamp Offset option in the wizard. See Calculating the Timestamp
Offset.
Tagging an Image
Once you successfully tag your digital images to a GPS log file or track file, you can view the
points at which the photos were taken on the map in your DeLorme program.
Before you begin, you must download the GPS log file or track file and digital photographs
to your computer. See Receiving a Track From Your Third-party GPS Device for information
on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files.
To Tag an Image
1. Click the GeoTagger button on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger Wizard.
2. Select Images and click Next.
3. In the Photo Directory box, type the path and file name for the folder (not specific
images) on your computer where the images are stored.
OR
Click Browse to search for the folder on your computer.
4. Under Time Zone, select the time zone where you were when you took the pictures.
See GMT Time Zone Information for a table of time zones by state.
If Daylight Saving Time was in effect (second Sunday in March through first Sunday
in November), select the Adjust for Daylight Saving Time check box.
5. Under GPS Data, select Track or GPL File.
6. If you selected Track, the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree menu.
Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu, and click the track. You can select only
one track at a time.
If you selected GPL File, in the GPS Data box, type the path and file name for the
file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
7. Click Next.
The Image list displays the images that will be tagged. Click an image to preview it
in Image Preview window.
8. Under Time Offset, if the time on your camera differed from actual time when you
recorded the data, calculate the offset, type the actual time in the Matching GPS
Time text box.
225

Street Atlas USA User Guide
9. Click Next.
10. Select how you want to place the image on the map.
• Hyperlink–A MapNote with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map.
• Embedded–A MapNote with a thumbnail image hyperlinked to the image
displays on the map.
• Symbol–A camera symbol with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map.
11. Click Next.
A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your images. Click
Finish. When you view the GPS log file or track on the map, you can see where the
images are tagged.
OR
An error message displays; usually this is because the timestamps for the camera
and the file or track do not match.
Calculate the Timestamp Offset
The time on your camera must match the time in the track or GPS log so the images display
in the correct place. If they do not, you must calculate a timestamp offset. If possible, do
this before you use the GeoTagger Wizard.
To Calculate the Timestamp Offset Before Using the Wizard
Use these steps to calculate the timestamp offset before you use the GeoTagger Wizard.
1. Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log.
2. Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture.
3. Make a note of the time.
4. Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on-screen steps.
5. When you get to the screen with the offset option, highlight the image in the file list.
The image timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box.
6. Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box.
To Calculate the Timestamp Offset When Using the Wizard
Use the following steps to calculate the timestamp offset if you are already using the
GeoTagger Wizard.
1. Click Cancel to exit the GeoTagger Wizard.
2. Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log.
3. Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture.
4. Make a note of the time.
5. Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on-screen steps until you get to the
screen with the offset option.
6. Highlight the image in the file list.
The image timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box.
7. Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box.
226

Legal Information
Street Atlas USA® 2015 Plus Single-User License
Agreement
This is an Agreement between you, the end user, and DeLorme. By using the Street Atlas
USA 2015 Plus software, data and documentation (the “System”), you are agreeing to be
bound by the terms of this Agreement.
If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, you may not use the System. Return
all materials within thirty (30) days of receipt to the dealer from which you obtained them
or to DeLorme for a full refund.
Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the terms
or conditions of this License Agreement as well as any other modification or amendment to
this Agreement will not be effective unless expressly agreed to in writing by both parties.
LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
THE LICENSED SYSTEM
The System consists of DeLorme's patented (U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,972,319; 5,030,117;
5,559,707; 5,802,492; and 6,321,158; other patents pending) processes for the formatting,
storage, retrieval and presentation of geographic and geographically related data;
DeLorme's copyrighted computer program for the use of those processes and related
functions; and compilations of geographic and supplemental data that are proprietary to
DeLorme or its licensors. The entire System, including the software, documentation, data
compilations, screen displays and map printouts are protected by U.S. and foreign
copyright. You have no ownership rights in the System. Rather, you have a license to use
the System as long as this Agreement remains in full force and effect.
YOUR USE OF THE SYSTEM
Permitted Use. This Agreement permits a registered user to use the System on a nonexclusive
basis for personal, reference or business purposes on a single computer at one
time. You may install the System on an auxiliary computer in addition to your principal
computer. However, one of these two computers must be portable and the software may
not be used simultaneously on both computers. Otherwise, once you have installed the
System on one computer you may use the System on a second computer only if you delete
the System from the first computer or purchase a separate license. Installation of any part
of the System on a network is prohibited unless you have a separate network license. For
information on network or multiple-user licensing, contact DeLorme at
https://contact.delorme.com or 1-800-293-2389. You may use the System as instructed by
the documentation to perform its designed functions only for the purposes authorized by
this Agreement.
Paper Map Printout Rights. You may reproduce paper copies or static digital images,
such as PDF or TIFF files, of any Street Atlas USA map for personal or household use or, if
you are a business or institution, for in-house purposes, provided that distribution and use
of such printouts and copies of printouts is limited to the location where the System is
installed or limited to use by employees based at that location.
Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights. You may distribute to family and friends,
including via fax, paper copies or static digital images, such as PDF or TIFF files, of Street
Atlas USA map printouts depicting locations of personal interest. You may distribute to your
colleagues, clients, customers or prospects, including via fax, paper copies or static digital
227

Street Atlas USA User Guide
images, such as PDF or TIFF files, of Street Atlas USA map printouts depicting the location
of your business or institution or the locations of your business or institution-related
meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that contain no paid advertising.
Paper Report Distribution Rights. You may reproduce for distribution to colleagues or
clients up to one thousand (1,000) paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map printouts for
use in paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies, provided that no such
report includes more than fifty (50) different Street Atlas USA maps and that the
distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted publication for sale or resale or
contain paid advertising.
Periodical Illustrations. You may reproduce paper copies of any Street Atlas USA map
printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical works, such as magazines,
newspapers and newsletters, provided that the publication is not primarily a collection of
maps, and provided that proper legend, as described below, accompanies the output. Such
articles may also be posted on your Web site. Graphic printers hired by licensee to print
DeLorme map images are required to purchase a license.
Special Presentation Rights. You may use paper copies of Street Atlas USA map displays
and printouts in presentations to live audiences only with prior written permission from
DeLorme.
Web Site Map Display Rights. You may display on your personal, business or institutional
static Web site map images derived from the System, provided that you include the Legend
indicated below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web site at www.delorme.com
from any page featuring a DeLorme map image. If you subcontract a web developer to
display map images said web developer must purchase a license.
Legend. Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the following
credit and copyright notice: “© 2015 DeLorme (www.delorme.com) Street Atlas USA Plus”.
You may not remove, alter, or conceal any copyright or trademark notices appearing on any
System output, except that when creating a mural map, you need only retain a single
legend with scale, for use in the field.
Phone Data. End User shall use Phone Data in compliance with any and all federal, state
or local statutes, regulations, or ordinances, including without limitation, any applicable
privacy, do-not-call, telemarketing, or related statutes regulations or ordinances. End User
shall defend and indemnify DeLorme, including attorney fees, against any claims arising out
of the violation by End User of this License Agreement. Export of phone data is limited to
one thousand (1,000) records at any one time. Phone data may not be used in conjunction
with any autodialer, or similar device, or for call center or telemarketing purposes.
Copy Services. You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies that are
authorized by this Agreement.
NetLink Tab. All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink Tab is subject to
DeLorme’s specific data use license agreement associated with those products. Commercial
use of NetLink data is prohibited.
You understand and agree that the trademarks, trade names, service marks,
copyrights and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and shall remain the
sole and exclusive property of DeLorme, and that you will not hold yourself
out as having any ownership rights thereto. You further agree that you will
make no use of such rights except as provided in this Agreement.
PROHIBITIONS ON USE
228

Legal Information
No Resale or Distribution. Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement, you do not
have the right to sell, or to reproduce or distribute for sale, any part of the System or
output of the System alone or in combination with any other text, data, software, or graphic
matter.
No Interactive Use. You do not have the right to combine the System interactively with
the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme.
No Modifications or Decompilation. Except through use of any software modification
functions provided with the System you have no right to modify the System in any way,
incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation or create any derivative work. You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or otherwise access source code or the
logical structure and contents of the System database.
No Third Party/Service Bureau Use. Except as specifically provided in this Agreement,
you may not (a) permit any third party to use the System or transfer, disclose or otherwise
make available the System to any third party, (b) use the System in the operation of a
service bureau or (c) allow access to the System through terminals located outside your
premises. You agree to secure and protect the System in a manner consistent with the
maintenance of DeLorme’s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or
agreement with your employees who are permitted access to the System to satisfy your
obligations hereunder.
No Copies. The copying of the System, any portion of the System, or any of the printed
materials accompanying the System is strictly prohibited.
All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme.
ADDITIONAL USE AND PUBLICATION RIGHTS MAY BE AVAILABLE UNDER A SEPARATE
EXTENDED LICENSE AGREEMENT. CONTACT DELORME AT
HTTPS://CONTACT.DELORME.COM FOR DETAILS AND PRICING.
WARNING, WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMER
Warning. THE SYSTEM IS SUITABLE AND INTENDED ONLY FOR GENERAL VISUAL
REFERENCE USE. IT SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE REQUIRING EXACT
MEASUREMENT OF DISTANCE OR DIRECTION, OR FOR PRECISION IN ADDRESS LOCATION
OR IN THE DEPICTION OF GEOGRAPHIC FEATURES. ROUTING DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE
USED ONLY AS A TRAVEL AID AND MUST ALWAYS BE VISUALLY VERIFIED BY THE USER ON
THE GROUND AND EXECUTED WITH DUE REGARD TO TRAFFIC AND ROAD CONDITIONS,
ROAD SIGNS AND REGULATIONS. Please note that the Data is merely a graphical
representation of geographic features appearing on the face of the earth. The Data may
include features, such as roads and trails, etc., that are located on private property. Nothing
in this License grants the use of, or is intended to imply the right to use, any such private
property. You should respect all landowner restrictions. You are solely responsible for
complying with all legal requirements relating to land use and for your own safety and for
the consequences of your actions in your use of the Data.
Limited Warranty on Media. DeLorme warrants that the media on which the System is
furnished shall, for a period of sixty (60) days from date of receipt (the "Warranty Period"),
be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use. If a defect in the
media appears during the Warranty Period, return all materials to DeLorme for replacement,
or at DeLorme’s option, refund of the license fee.
Disclaimer of Warranty. DeLorme does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of the
System, or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error-free. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE,
THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED “AS IS” AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER
229

Street Atlas USA User Guide
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
No Consequential Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL DELORME BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EVEN IF DELORME HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
TERMINATION AND TRANSFER
DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason, including, but not
limited to, if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this Agreement or
that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way. Termination will be
effective upon written notice to you. Upon termination of this Agreement you agree to
promptly return all copies of the System, documentation and other materials furnished to
you or made by you, including unauthorized copies. Termination is in addition to and not in
lieu of any other remedies available to DeLorme. All provisions relating to property rights
shall survive termination. You are not authorized to transfer your rights under this
Agreement.
OTHER
This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and supersedes
and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding, whether oral or
written, with respect to its subject matter. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Maine, applicable to agreements wholly executed and wholly performed in
Maine. Any action relating to this Agreement shall be brought in federal or state court in
Maine and the parties consent to the personal jurisdiction of either such court.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS IN COMMERCIAL SOFTWARE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government of all parts of the Licensed Data except
any USGS data is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software
license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in
DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) or DFARS 227.225-7013 (OCT 1988), as
applicable, or FAR 12.212(a), FAR 52.227-14 or FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
CANADIAN GOVERNMENT DATA
Certain of the Canadian data included in the System are Adapted from Statistics Canada,
FSA Boundary File, 92F0170XCE, 2001 Census; or Statistics Canada, 2005 Road Network
File, 92-500-XWE; or Melissa Data's Canadian Postal Data product, based on input from STC
data files.
Statistics Canada information is used with the permission of Statistics Canada. Users are
forbidden to copy this material and/or re-disseminate the data, in an original or modified
form, for commercial purposes, without the expressed permission of Statistics Canada.
Information on the availability of the wide range of data from Statistics Canada can be
obtained from Statistics Canada's Regional Offices, its World Wide Web site at
http://www.statcan.ca, and its toll-free access number 1-800-263-1136.
Copyright © 2015 DeLorme. All rights reserved.
230

Legal Information
Important Notices
Patent and Copyright Notice
Street Atlas USA/StreetAtlas USA Plus is a limited field of use license under United States
Patent law including the following patents owned by DeLorme: U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,972,319;
5,030,117; 5,559,707; 5,802,492; and 6,321,158. Other patents pending. All software,
data compilations, screen displays and map printouts are all protected by U.S. and foreign
copyright and owned by DeLorme or its licensors. Purchaser of license acquires no rights
that are not specifically set forth in the License Agreement included in the documentation.
U.S. Government Rights in Commercial Software
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in the
commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by
DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7203-3(a) or DFARS 227.225-
7013 (OCT 1988), as applicable, or FAR 12.212(a), FAR 52.227-14 or FAR 52.227-19, as
applicable.
Copyright © 2015 DeLorme.
Curl License
Copyright © 1996-2010, Daniel Stenberg,
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
LibTiff License
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for
any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices
and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation,
and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising
or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam
Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
231

Street Atlas USA User Guide
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
CSMap License
Copyright © 2008, Autodesk, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Autodesk, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Autodesk, Inc. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL Autodesk, Inc. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Boost License
Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy
of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software")
to use, reproduce, display, distribute,execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare
derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license
grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer,must be included in all copies of the
Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or
derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a
source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
232

Legal Information
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
JasPer License
JasPer License Version 2.0
Copyright © 1999-2000 Image Power, Inc.
Copyright © 1999-2000 The University of British Columbia
Copyright © 2001-2003 Michael David Adams
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person (the"User") obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction,including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge,publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
1. The above copyright notices and this permission notice (which includes the disclaimer
below) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
2. The name of a copyright holder shall not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from the Software without specific prior written permission.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS
DISCLAIMER. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS"AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE. NO ASSURANCES ARE PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS THAT THE
SOFTWARE DOES NOT INFRINGE THE PATENT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
OF ANY OTHER ENTITY. EACH COPYRIGHT HOLDER DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY TO THE
USER FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE. AS A CONDITION TO EXERCISING THE
RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER, EACH USER HEREBY ASSUMES SOLE RESPONSIBILITY TO
SECURE ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS NEEDED, IF ANY. THE SOFTWARE
IS NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN MISSION-CRITICAL
SYSTEMS, SUCH AS THOSE USED IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES,AIRCRAFT
NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS, DIRECT
LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE
SOFTWARE OR SYSTEM COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH,PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE
PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ("HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES"). THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
ShapeLib License
Copyright © 1999, Frank Warmerdam
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
233

Street Atlas USA User Guide
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
GDAL Proj4 License
Copyright © 2000, Frank Warmerdam
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
GDAL gtiff Format License
Copyright © 2002, Industrial Light & Magic, a division of Lucas Digital Ltd. LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Industrial Light & Magic nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
234

Legal Information
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
GDAL hdf4 Format License
Copyright © 1996 Hughes and Applied Research Corporation
Permission to use, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation.
GDAL pcraster Format License
Copyright © 1997-2003, Utrecht University
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Utrecht University nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
GDAL grib Format License
The degrib and g2clib source code are modified versions of code produced by NOAA NWS
and are in the public domain subject to the following restrictions:
http://www.weather.gov/im/softa.htm
DISCLAIMER The United States Government makes no warranty, expressed or implied, as to
the usefulness of the software and documentation for any purpose. The U.S. Government,
its instrumentalities, officers, employees, and agents assumes no responsibility (1) for the
235

Street Atlas USA User Guide
use of the software and documentation listed below, or (2) to provide technical support to
users.
http://www.weather.gov/disclaimer.php
The information on government servers are in the public domain, unless specifically
annotated otherwise, and may be used freely by the public so long as you do not 1) claim it
is your own (e.g. by claiming copyright for NWS information -- see below), 2) use it in a
manner that implies an endorsement or affiliation with NOAA/NWS, or 3) modify it in
content and then present it as official government material. You also cannot present
information of your own in a way that makes it appear to be official government
information..
The user assumes the entire risk related to its use of this data. NWS is providing this data
"as is," and NWS disclaims any and all warranties, whether express or implied, including
(without limitation) any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose. In no event will NWS be liable to you or to any third party for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, special or exemplary damages or lost profit resulting from any use
or misuse of this data.
As required by 17 U.S.C. 403, third parties producing copyrighted works consisting
predominantly of the material appearing in NWS Web pages must provide notice with such
work(s) identifying the NWS material incorporated and stating that such material is not
subject to copyright protection.
Acxiom License
The program includes information that is proprietary to Acxiom Corporation and is protected under
U.S. copyright law and international treaty provisions. This information is licensed for your personal
or professional use and may not be resold or provide to others. You may not distribute, sell, rent,
sublicense, or lease such information in whole or in part to any third party; you will not make such
Acxiom information available in whole or in part to any other user in any networked or time-sharing
environment, or transfer the information in whole or in part to any computer other than the PC used
to access this information.
236

Index
3
3D Fix ............ 21, 27, 191, 201, 210, 215
A
About GPS ....................................... 204
Activating Speech Recognition ........... 210
Add/Delete Words ............................ 216
Adding a Symbol .............................. 158
Adding a Text Label .......................... 158
Adding a Waypoint ........................... 158
Adding Draw Objects .. 150, 151, 155, 158
Adding Points to Draw Objects ........... 148
Adding Stops and Vias ...................... 176
Adding Text or Graphics ...................... 81
Address Book..... 105, 106, 107, 108, 109,
110
Advanced Search ............................... 93
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your
Map ............................................... 83
Almanac .......................................... 202
Along the Way ............................ 80, 181
Anchor Position ................................ 171
Arc(s) ...............................150, 152, 154
Assembling a Multi-page Map............... 86
Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom
Symbol ........................................ 164
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts .............. 61
Audio Controls ................................. 216
Auto Zoom To Turn .......................... 191
Automatically Detect GPS .................. 191
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing
................................................... 180
B
Back on Track .................................. 197
Basic Map Features............................. 49
Basic Search ...................................... 92
Beep When Heard ............................ 210
Bitmap ........................ 14, 166, 168, 169
Breaking Linear Objects .................... 154
C
Category ......................................... 166
Category Searches ........................... 100
Center on GPS ................................. 198
Centering Routes on the Map ............. 185
Centering the Map .............................. 13
Centering the Map on an Address Book
Contact ........................................ 106
Changing Draw Object Types ............. 140
Changing How POIs Display on the Map 53
Changing the Background Color of a
Printed Map .................................... 85
Changing the Map Colors ..................... 52
Changing the Map Magnification ........... 53
Changing the Properties of a Stop ...... 179
Changing Voice Output ..................... 215
Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats 16
Clear Trail ....................................... 199
Compass Rose ................................... 18
Connecting Data ................................ 67
Control Panel ..................................... 18
Converting a Route to a GPS Log........ 188
Converting MapTags to MapNotes ....... 102
Coordinate Formats ............................ 16
Coordinates ................................ 54, 201
Copy Symbol to Waypoint ................. 140
Copy to Active Road Layer ................. 140
Copy to Active Track Layer ................ 140
Copy to Active Trail Layer .................. 140
Copy to Draw Object ........................ 140
Copy Track to GPS Log ..................... 140
Copying a Draw File .......................... 139
Copying a Draw Object From One Draw
File to Another .............................. 142
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File ...... 137
Copying and Pasting ......................... 167
Copying and Placing Draw Objects ...... 143
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard ....... 13
County Borders .................................. 49
Create Dataset ................................. 122
Create Route from Line ..................... 150
Creating a New Custom Scheme .... 61, 63
Creating a New Draw File .................. 128
Creating a New Symbol ..................... 163
237

Street Atlas USA User Guide
Creating a New Symbol Set ............... 172
Creating a Route .............................. 175
Creating a Route with XData Records .. 121
Creating Transfer Files ........................ 73
Cursor Position ................................ 172
Custom Points of Interest .................... 51
Custom Symbols .............................. 162
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme .......... 63
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences
..................................................... 51
D
Data Corrections .............................. 225
Data Zoom Level .......................... 11, 18
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book
................................................... 108
Deleting a Custom Scheme .................. 64
Deleting a Draw File ......................... 130
Deleting a Route .............................. 186
Deleting Draw Objects ...................... 146
Deleting Points and Line Segments from
Draw Objects ................................ 148
Deleting Your Entire Address Book ..... 109
Dilution of Precision .......................... 202
Directions ........................... 80, 179, 181
Disable Screen Saver ........................ 191
Display ....................................... 52, 53
Display Route Vias............................ 181
Display Waypoint Labels.................... 181
Displaying Basic Map Features ............. 49
Displaying Routes on the Map ............ 185
Drag and Zoom .................................. 11
Dragging a Bitmap into XSym ............ 169
Draw . 128, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 138,
139, 140, 142, 143, 144, 145, 146,
147, 148, 150, 151, 155, 156, 158,
166, 169, 173, 180
Draw Layer ...................................... 128
Draw Tool Box ................................. 170
E
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book
................................................... 107
Editing a Route ................................ 182
Editing a Symbol .............................. 165
Editing Draw Objects .. 152, 153, 156, 160
Editing Roads .................................. 183
Editing/Locking Draw Files ................. 131
Elevation .................................... 18, 201
E-mailing a Transfer File ..................... 77
Enable GPS Voice Navigation ............. 191
Enable LED on GPS Device ................ 191
Enable Stationary Logging ................. 191
Enable WAAS Use ............................. 191
End of Day Breaks ............................ 187
Entering Address Book Information .... 106
Estimate Fuel Breaks ........................ 187
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route 188
Exchange Wizard ........ 219, 220, 221, 222
Export to New Dataset ...................... 122
Export to Text File ............................ 122
Exporting a Custom Scheme ................ 64
Exporting Data ................................. 122
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files ....... 132
Exporting Tab Manager Preferences ...... 58
Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX
Files............................................. 133
Exporting Your Address Book ............. 110
E-Z Nav ............................. 21, 192, 197
F
FAQs .................................................. 1
File Preview ..................................... 200
Find ... 91, 96, 97, 98, 102, 106, 109, 114,
166
Find Options ...................................... 91
Finding a Custom Symbol .................. 166
Finding a Symbol by Its Name ............. 98
Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific
Road ............................................ 114
Finding Points Near Your Current Location
..................................................... 97
Formatting a Text File to Import as a
Draw File ...................................... 135
Frequently Asked Questions ................... 1
Fuel ................................................ 179
G
Geocode............................119, 120, 121
Getting Back on Track ....................... 197
Global Positioning System ................. 204
238

Index
GPS 43, 97, 191, 195, 198, 199, 200, 201,
204
GPS Options .................................... 191
GPS Radar ......................................... 97
GPS Voice Navigation................. 209, 216
Grab and Pan ..................................... 46
Grids ................................................ 49
H
Heading .......................................... 201
Hidden Draw Tools ........................... 128
Hide Route ...................................... 185
Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map
................................................... 109
Hiding Draw Files ............................. 130
Hiding Tabs ....................................... 57
Hiding Toolbar Buttons ........................ 41
High-contrast Colors ........................... 52
Horizontal Resize Tool ......................... 56
I
Image .................. 14, 158, 166, 168, 169
Importing a Bitmap .......................... 166
Importing a Custom Scheme ............... 64
Importing Data ................................ 117
Importing Existing Address Book
Information .................................. 105
Importing Files to Draw Files ............. 133
Importing Routes ............................. 187
Importing Tab Manager Preferences ..... 58
Importing Transfer Files ...................... 75
Info .................................................. 45
Initializing GPS ................................ 191
Inserting Stops and Vias ................... 176
International Labels ............................ 49
Interval ............................................. 18
J
Joining Linear Objects ....................... 154
JPEG ................................................. 14
K
Keyboard Shortcuts ........... 61, 63, 64, 65
Keywords for Category Searches ........ 100
L
Labeling a Draw Object ..................... 149
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote 184
Large POI Symbols ............................. 53
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items
on a Printed Map ............................. 85
Legend ............................................. 37
Line ................................................ 150
M
Magnification .............................. 53, 191
Make Stop ....................................... 182
Make Via ......................................... 182
Managing Datasets ........................... 119
Map Center Crosshair ......................... 49
Map Colors ........................................ 52
Map Coordinates ................................ 18
Map Features ............................... 49, 51
Map Files ................................ 69, 70, 72
Map Legend ....................................... 37
Map Rotation Tool .............................. 18
MapNote ......................................... 158
MapShare .......................................... 42
MapTags
Converting, Moving, Hiding, and
Deleting .................................... 102
Measure ...................................... 47, 54
Microphone............................... 210, 216
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information .. 202
Monitoring Speech Recognition .......... 210
Monitoring Your GPS Status ............... 201
Moving a Contact's Location On the Map
................................................... 107
Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw
File .............................................. 143
Moving a Record's Location................ 121
Moving and Deleting MapNotes ... 161, 184
Moving Draw Objects ........................ 144
N
NavMode .......................... 1, 21, 43, 194
Netbook ............................. 46, 49, 207
NetLink ........................................... 225
O
Opening a Symbol Set ...................... 173
Options Dialog Box 46, 49, 51, 52, 53, 54,
61, 63, 191, 216
Overview Map .................................... 19
239

Street Atlas USA User Guide
P
Panning the Map ......................... 13, 198
Pasting a Bitmap into XSym............... 168
Phone ...................................... 111, 114
Picture ................. 14, 158, 166, 168, 169
Placing Draw Objects ..........154, 157, 161
Playing Back a Log File ...................... 199
POI Search ........................................ 96
POIs ........................................... 49, 96
Polygon .................................... 155, 156
Previewing a GPS Log File .......... 200, 207
Print .............. 14, 47, 79, 80, 83, 85, 181
Print Maps with a Transparent Background
..................................................... 85
Print Maps With a Yellow/Black
Background .................................... 85
Q
QuickSearch ................................ 92, 98
R
Recalculate When Off Route ............... 191
Receiving a Route ............................ 221
Receiving a Track ............................. 222
Receiving Waypoints ......................... 222
Recenter Map on GPS ................ 191, 198
Recognition Settings ......................... 216
Rectangle ................................. 155, 156
Reference Card .................................. 65
Relocating Address Book Contacts ...... 108
Removing a Symbol .......................... 169
Renaming a Custom Scheme ............... 63
Renaming a Draw Object ................... 145
Reordering the Tabs ........................... 59
Reordering the Toolbar ....................... 41
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas ........... 56
Reverse Route ................................. 182
RoadLayer ....................................... 128
Rotate Map in GPS Direction .............. 191
Routable Roads ..................150, 152, 154
Routable Trails ...................150, 152, 154
Route .. 42, 176, 179, 182, 183, 184, 185,
186, 187
Route Avoid ..................................... 180
Route Directions .............................. 179
Route Prefs .............................. 181, 184
S
Satellites .................................. 202, 204
Save as GPS Log File ................. 137, 188
Saving a Draw File ........................... 129
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image
..................................................... 14
Saving a Route ................................ 185
Saving a Track as a GPS Log ............. 137
Saving Route Directions as Text ......... 181
Scale Bar .......................................... 18
Searching for a Phone Book Listing ..... 111
Searching for Address Book Contacts .. 105
Searching For Commands .................... 65
Searching Tips ................................... 17
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme . 61
Sending Route Information ................ 219
Sending Tracks to Your GPS Device .... 220
Sending Waypoints ........................... 220
Setting Units of Measure Preferences .... 54
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break
Preferences .................................. 187
Setting Your Routing Preferences ....... 181
Share Maps ....................................... 42
Show All Commands .................. 210, 211
Show Comments MapNotes ............... 184
Show GPS Bread Crumb Trail ............. 191
Show Location MapNotes ................... 184
Show Summary MapNotes ................. 184
Show Turns ..................................... 179
Showing Address Book Contacts on the
Map ............................................. 109
Showing Tabs .................................... 57
Showing Toolbar Features ................... 41
Skyview .......................................... 202
Snapping Draw Objects ..................... 147
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your
Map ............................................... 84
Speech Profile Training .............. 210, 216
Speech Recognition ................... 210, 214
Speed ............................................. 201
Spline ............................................. 150
Start GPS ................................. 191, 198
240

Index
Stop Prefs ................................ 179, 182
Stops .............................................. 176
Strip Maps ......................................... 80
Supported Coordinate Formats............. 16
Symbol ........................................... 158
Synchronizing Phone Data with the Phone
Tab .............................................. 111
T
Tab Configuration .................... 56, 57, 58
Tab Manager ............................... 57, 58
Text Label ....................................... 158
Tips on Viewing Search Results ............ 99
Toolbar ...... 20, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47
Town Borders .................................... 49
Track . 133, 137, 151, 153, 195, 197, 198,
220, 222
TrackLayer ...................................... 128
TrailLayer ........................................ 128
Training the Speech Recognition Engine
................................................... 210
Transfer File ........................... 73, 75, 77
Travel Package .................................. 80
Turn Details ....................................... 80
Tutorial .................................. 25, 30, 34
U
UMPC................................... 46, 49, 207
Urban Area Color................................ 49
Use Custom Map Features ................... 51
Use High-Contrast Colors .................. 191
Using the Transparency Option .......... 170
V
Vertical Resize Tool ............................ 56
Vias ................................................ 176
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a
Scheme .......................................... 65
Viewing Dataset Records ................... 120
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log ...... 201
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools ............... 128
Viewing Route Directions ................... 179
Viewing the Contents of a Draw File.... 138
Voice ................. 209, 210, 211, 215, 216
W
Waypoint ........................................ 158
Waypoint ID .................................... 164
WaypointLayer ................................. 128
Welcome Screen ................................ 71
X
XData ... 34, 117, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123
XSym 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168,
169, 170, 171, 172
Z
ZIP/Postal Codes ................................ 49
Zoom Tools ................................. 11, 18
Zooming In and Out ........................... 11
241